hp data protector best practice guide enu

32
Technical white paper Best practice guide for HP Data Protector Protecting your most valuable asset: information HP Data Protector is the first data backup solution in the entire industry to provide a uniform deduplication solution from the source to the target, and protect mission-critical data in virtual and physical environments. More than 45,000 customers worldwide trust their HP Data Protector solution to protect their most valuable asset—information. Summary This white paper provides recommendations for the implementation of a backup and recovery strategy for HP Data Protector that allows you to optimize the way you use Data Protector in each IT environment. The guide concludes with references to other sources of information related to Data Protector and a glossary of important terms. Also included are detailed analyses of the configuration of the software, performance of the backup environment and the connected devices, settings in daily backup operations, as well as recommendations for practical applications of the solution. The first section of the guide summarizes the important steps of a successful HP Data Protector implementation. The second section explains the steps, where necessary, in more detail and illustrates them with the corresponding examples. This document is aimed at all users of HP Data Protector, system integrators and solution architects, as well as those who would like to optimize the way they use the software.

Upload: claudioquinteroscarreno

Post on 10-Dec-2015

163 views

Category:

Documents


10 download

DESCRIPTION

HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

Technical white paper

Best practice guide for HP Data ProtectorProtecting your most valuable asset information

HP Data Protector is the first data backup solution in the entire industry to provide a uniform deduplication solution from the source to the target and protect mission-critical data in virtual and physical environments More than 45000 customers worldwide trust their HP Data Protector solution to protect their most valuable assetmdashinformation

Summary

This white paper provides recommendations for the implementation of a backup and recovery strategy for HP Data Protector that allows you to optimize the way you use Data Protector in each IT environment The guide concludes with references to other sources of information related to Data Protector and a glossary of important terms Also included are detailed analyses of the configuration of the software performance of the backup environment and the connected devices settings in daily backup operations as well as recommendations for practical applications of the solution The first section of the guide summarizes the important steps of a successful HP Data Protector implementation The second section explains the steps where necessary in more detail and illustrates them with the corresponding examples This document is aimed at all users of HP Data Protector system integrators and solution architects as well as those who would like to optimize the way they use the software

2

Table of contents

HP Data Protector Overview 3

Steps for Successful Implementation 3

What data should be backed up 6

How where and with the deployment of what technology should the backup be created 7

Loss of Data Downtimes 7

Retention Periods 8

Licenses 8

Data Volume Data Growth Sizing and Backup Times 9

Requirements and Recommendations for HP Data Protector Cell Server 10

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose 10

What is patch bundle and what order is required for the updates 12

How is the DP software installed on the server that requires a backup 13

File lsquoglobalrsquo 13

File omnirc omnirc 14

Block Size 16

Segment Size 17

Disk Agent Buffers 18

Concurrency Multiplexing 18

Multi-streaming 19

Null Device 20

LAN vs SAN Backups 21

Tools 22

Jukebox 24

File Library 24

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication 25

Evaluations in HP Data Protector 25

Notifications in HP Data Protector 26

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions 26

External Tools 26

Purge 27

Recovery Tests and Disaster Recovery 28

Glossary 29

Appendix A ndash Speeds 31

Additional Sources of Information 32

LAN

GUI

Manager of Managers

Cell Managers

Internal Database

Media Devices LibrariesFiles Versions Atributes

Backup-Agent(Disk-Agent)

Application-Agent(Online-Agent)

Media-Agent

Backup to Tape

UserApplication

Backup to Disk

Zero Downtime Backup and Instant Recovery

Backup to Virtual Tape Catalyst Store

ControlData

HP Data Protector architecture

3

HP Data Protector overview

The diagram below describes the concept and functions of HP Data Protector showing both the data streams and control paths of the software Refer to the glossary at the end of the guide for explanations about the terms used in the diagram

Steps for a successful implementation

A successful implementation of a backup and recovery strategy requires you to consider many factors The points listed below are based on experience from a practical application collected from many customers (SMBs and corporate groups) examining major aspects from planning to regular operation The steps are divided into logical groups so you can easily use this document as a reference for your own implementation of HP Data Protector (referred to in this guide as DP)

Note The details specified apply mostly to a Microsoft Windows environment but are applicable to other settings and approaches and can be used as a template for further improvement in your own environment

Backup and recovery strategyA stable and functioning backup and recovery environment is a critical part of a high-performing organization With a solid data backup system in place when loss of data occurs it can be restored within a previously defined timeframe regardless of the cause inadvertently or deliberately deleted corrupted due to errors in applications a hacker attack data lost due to hardware errors or other reasons Another aspect of backup and recovery is the necessity to restore historical data for example due to legally prescribed requirements

Regular backups are a simple form of disaster preparedness Backups alone however are not a disaster recovery plan The infrastructure of your organization also has to be examined For instance consider the following

bull Do you have an alternative data center

bull Are critical applications configured in a cluster

bull Is the network connection configured as redundant

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

4

As part of a solid backup and recovery program it is recommended that you integrate your company strategy with a disaster recovery plan that support the necessary backup and recovery requirements availabilities storage and hardware redundancies that meets your unique needs

When considering your backup and recovery strategy and as you perform a detailed analysis of your infrastructure consider the following points should therefore be examined intensively

bull What data should be backed up

bull How where and using what technology should the backup be created

bull How much data loss is tolerable (RPO) and what are your acceptable downtimes (RTO)

bull What are your data retention periods

Planning and preparation Ensuring the optimal implementation of a Data Protector environment requires detailed planning and preparation The planning starts with the selection of the operating system for the installation of HP Data Protector Cell Manager The Cell Manager is available for Linux HP-UX and Microsoft Windows The 64-bit variant of each operating system is preferred because it enables you to use the advanced options of HP Data Protector In the case of Microsoft MS Windows Server 2012 or 2012R2 is preferred The DP Cell Servers can also be installed in a cluster environment making it faster to entrust the protection of mission-critical data to a redundantly configured backup solution

Other aspects to consider in the planning phase bull Licenses

bull Data volume data growth scope of the infrastructure backup times (backup window)

bull Requirements and recommendations for the Cell Server

Installation and updateOnce the preparatory planning work for the backup and recovery environment has been completed you can install the Cell Server The process for installation is automated and can be completed in a few minutes

Sign in here to get supporthttpssoftwaresupporthpcomgroupsoftwaresupporthome

A few questions that may arise during and after the installation

bull Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

bull What is a patch bundle and in what order do you load the updates

bull How do you install the DP software on the server that requires a backup

ConfigurationOnce the installation of HP Data Protector is completed the solution is now ready in principle for deployment Drives can be set up pools can be defined media can be formatted backups can be set up and executed But there are a few areas that still require configuration as follows

HP Data Protector is installed with the so-called default settings which are valid for virtually any environment without any further adjustment Nonetheless in practice it is often advisable to change the Data Protector configuration files to your own environment as these can for example contain limitations with the corresponding individual customization or significantly influence the performance of the system

While descriptions of all the parameters are not included in this guide you can refer to detailed descriptions in the configuration files and help files andor the HP Data Protector manuals The following paragraphs will provide a few recommendations from practical application

The customisable files are lsquoglobarsquol and lsquoomnircrsquo (Linux Unix omnirc)

bullglobal The parameters in this file affect the entire environment managed by this Data Protector Cell Manager For example a change made to the timeout setting here will apply it to the entire environment managed under this Cell Manager Important to remember and in some cases necessary parameters are described in the second section of the guide

bullomnirc The options in this file only affect the individual client for which backup is configured In general it is recommended only to change the settings in this file if required by the environment The second section of the guide explains why customization is necessary for most environments and which parameters can be configured

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

5

Performance Performance tests should be considered part of the installation process for every Data Protector implementation They document the status of the environment to be backed up and reveal possible bottlenecks in the infrastructure The documentation of the conditions and results of the performance tests enables a comparison in the event of later repetition allowing conclusions to be drawn regarding the performance of the infrastructure Performance tests also enable optimal adjustment of the backup and recovery implementation to the circumstances of the environment because theory and practice do not always match up 100

The following points are relevant to the execution of the performance tests The combination of all the functions described allow you to enhance the overall performance of your backups

bullBlock size All drives (physical and virtual tape drives as well as backup-to-disk drives) are set up in HP Data Protector with a default block size For DP versions 7X the default value is 64 kB and for version 8X the default value is 256 kB As a rule increasing the size to 256 kB (DP versions lt 8X or for HP-UX) or 512 kB enhances the data throughput to the connected devices

bullSegment size When setting up new devices in HP Data Protector a default segment size is specified depending on the media type used As a rule increasing the segment size also increases the data throughput and also the speed of the data backup Depending on the media type that is used the size should be increased gradually

bullDiskagentbuffers Disk agent buffers have no direct influence on the overall performance of the backup but in the case of network backups they can lead to a constant data flow on the media agent The value 16 for this parameter has proven effective in practice

bullConcurrencymultiplexing On setting up the drives a default concurrency is specified depending on the media type that is used this value is often too low for the environment Raising it to 10 for example can considerably increase the backup speed and reduce the total duration of the backup As a rule a higher concurrency ensures better supply of the tape drive with data to be backed up

bullMulti-streaming Although the concurrency can be set when creating a backup specification only one disk agent per mount point is started during the backup In the case of very comprehensive mount points this can lead to a bottleneck during the data backup The individual configuration of multi-streaming can significantly enhance the performance of the backup for the individual mount points

bullNull device The null device describes a special drive type through which the maximum speed of a backup can be determined Furthermore the null device provides the possibility to test the settings for drives and identify possible bottlenecks in the environment

bullLAN vs SAN backups The SAN backup is preferred and allows you to make effective use of tape drive resources High bandwidths are required for backups via network (key word trunk or 10 GbE) to be able to take a tape device to the saturation limit

bullTools Various tools are available for performance analysis for example HPReadData HPCreateData and as a complete package HP LTT (Library and Tape Tools)

Backup-to-disk technologies Disk-based backup targets (backup-to-disk) offer fast and reliable ways to recover data HP Data Protector offers a continuum of backup target options that can be implemented as part of a recovery chain Those options are Data Protector Smart Cache traditional disk-based backup appliances (example StoreOnce and Data Domain appliances) tape and cloud

The following backup-to-disk technologies are available

bull Jukebox

bull File Library

bull B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

bull Data Protector Smart Cache

Documentation and reporting Once the backup and recovery environment is fully installed and the backups are running in daily operation you might think that the job is done But it isnrsquot An essential point for the implementation is still missing documentation of the environment

Good documentation of the environment is a requirement for successful recovery in the event of a disaster The documentation should contain at least the server names IP addresses mount points and directories to be backed up priorities and order for the recovery (example 1 MS Active Directory 2 DNS 3 MS Exchange) maximum recovery time maximum loss of data and the data volumes to be backed up

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

6

Optionally reporting can be used to record and document the data growth of the backups A schematic diagram of the environment helps other employees in the company to obtain quick insight into the environment An emergency handbook might include among other things the description of processes and responsibilities to help ensure efficient procedures in the event of a disaster

Other possibilities for documentation include

bull Creating reports in HP Data Protector

bull Creating notifications in HP Data Protector

bull Connectivity to monitoring solutions which helps to detect and document problems at an early stage

bull Documentation of the environment with external tools

bull The use of HP Backup Navigator an interactive web-based reporting and analytics application for the entire Data Protector environment

MaintenanceWith successful operation of the backup and recovery solution and with steady growth of the environment the Data Protector installation can be faced with new challenges However in many cases the data center environment changes unpredictably as additional workloads are added or data grows faster than originally expected which can result in insufficient backup windows to complete the backup task In these cases regular maintenance dates should be scheduled Depending on the size of the environment maintenance dates should set quarterly to twice a year The objective of the maintenance is to proactively assess the state of the backup environment and fine-tune Data Protector parameters for optimal backup and recovery performance

The following activities should be included in a maintenance date

bullPurge A purge of the internal database helps to remove entries that are no longer required and ultimately ensures consistent good performance of the backup environment This task is performed automatically with HP Data Protector version 8X For HP Data Protector versions 6 and 7 the purge is a necessary task to clean up and defragment the internal database

bullClean-up The reality with any implementation is that the environment changes new clients are installed and servers are decommissioned Often clients that no longer exist are not removed from the Data Protector configuration This is particularly noticeable for example when you want to create new SQL backups in the user interface of Data Protector and results in the user interface running slowly As a rule the cause of this is a check of the name resolution for the backup clients being carried out in the background This causes a timeout for systems that no longer exist and leads to significantly slower characteristics of the user interface Regular detection and maintenance of the backup client is therefore advisable

bullPatches A maintenance date or times in which a no backup is carried out are good opportunities for the installation of new updates This allows problems to be remedied and new functions to be enabled A requirement for installation of the updates is a valid maintenance agreement Furthermore support packs for the server and updates of the firmware for the server and tape library can also be installed in this period Also the HP Library and Tape Tools are available to use to update the firmware of HP libraries

bullRecovery tests and disaster recovery Within the framework of maintenance the recovery of files and servers should be verified at regular intervals to provide greater security and assurance in the event of serious incidents

bullDocumentation Within the framework of maintenance it is a good idea to verify and adapt the existing documentation of the backup environment Moreover if present the emergency handbook can be revised and supplemented in the course of performing these other tasks The BRICK tool can also be used to record the ACTUAL state of the Data Protector environment on the maintenance date and store it as documentation

What data should be backed up

The answer to this question depends on the requirements for the environment In principle everything should be backed up including the system state Only individual files or directories should be taken out of the backup by means of exclusion rules In general it applies that a backup must contain at least the data that are necessary for recovery of the application on the system In the case of an MS SQL server this involves at least a backup of the databases and the transactions and the settings of the SQL server The operating system could for example also be restored by rolling out a prepared operating system template with the deployment of virtual machines

Making decisions about backing up data by an individual server is typically inadequate In a company there can be business processes that are mapped on a number of servers For example if the company operates a web service to be able to offer customers spare parts ordering the web service does not consist only of the web server As a rule the

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

7

operation of the web service also requires connectivity to the internet DNS credit checks possibly an Active Directory possibly a file server and a CRM solution In case of a disaster the entire service must therefore be examined and its data backed up andor safeguarded against failures

Tip In many cases only the central location of the company is examined A backup and recovery strategy for external offices should also be a constituent part of the definition With HP Data Protector and the integrated deduplication technologies or the HP StoreOnce system external offices can be easily included in the overall data protection strategy

How where and what technology should be used to create the backup

HP Data Protector provides a broad spectrum of options to safeguard mission-critical data against disaster A few examples of the possibilities are provided below

bullIntegrations The backup of applications and databases takes place by means of a special agent which ensures that applications are placed in a calm state (backup state) to enable application-consistent data backup In the event of a disaster the application can then be restored including transactions In the case of virtualized environments the complete virtual machine and with the Microsoft VSS framework also the application (for example MS Exchange) can be backed up in the virtual machine by means of the integration

bullDisk staging This is a technology where the data are first of all cached on a hard disk area before they are copied onto a physical tape in a downstream process With simultaneous integration of deduplication a greater number of backups can be kept Disk staging is suitable primarily for backups with a short retention period as with intermediate storage and for rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullIncremental forever Incremental forever refers to a special process in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup Here the backup takes place partially or completely on a hard disk area with regular consolidations of the data stocks ensuring rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullDeduplication Deduplication refers to a method of detecting and removing redundancies on block level during the backup when the blocks to be backed up are compared with blocks that have already been backed up This method is holistically integrated into the HP portfolio (HP StoreOnce systems and HP Data Protector) and permits for example complete integration of the external offices into the central backup and recovery strategy of a company

Tip The combination of the different technologies in HP Data Protector provides comprehensive flexibility and optimal support for the company in the possible event of a disaster

Loss of datadowntimes

The extent of loss of data and acceptable recovery times should be determined individually for each system or each service of the company The type and frequency of backups in HP Data Protector can be derived from the data obtained

Tip Please note that patching and upgrading Data Protector doesnrsquot create any downtime

Explanations of some key terms are provided below

bull Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the maximum loss of data in the event of a failure As a rule it is the time interval between two backups This value specifies the maximum volume of transactions or data that can be lost between the last backup and a possible case of disaster

bull Recovery Time Objective (RTO) refers to the agreed recovery time and as a rule is the period between occurrence of a disaster and recovery of the business processes Possible additional activities can be

ndash Hardware provision and recovery of the infrastructure

ndash Connection and configuration of the hardware on the network

ndash Recovery of the operating system

ndash Installation of the backup client software

ndash Identification of the data and information to be reloaded

ndash Identification of the required backup medium and its provision

ndash Data recovery from tape

ndash Recovery of databases

ndash Test and share of the reloaded data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Disaster

LogicalPhysicalHardware (server)SAN switchFirewallNetworkStorageData center (powercooling)

Data deletionData corruptionHuman errorFW updatespatchesSabotage

8

bull The illustration shows an example of how a failure (case of disaster) can occur and what causes it

Tip A list of all servers and services of the company with evaluation of the priorities data volumes backup frequencies and recovery times should be a constituent part of every disaster recovery plan

Retention periods

The retention period refers to the period in which data must be available for recovery With HP Data Protector there are various possibilities for configuring the protection period of a backup ranging from no protection period at all to days weeks months and yearsmdashall the way to permanent protection of the data HP Data Protector is therefore also ideal for long-term data archival though it should not be confused with an archiving solution

For example the legal regulations in Germany based on the type of data (for example documents with significance for tax invoices and annual accounts) and industry sector (for example medical data) range from 6 10 or 20 years up to permanent retention Every company is under obligation to implement and comply with the regulations applicable to that company

Tip To protect against inadvertent overwriting of the tapes (human error) or destruction of the data due to sabotage it is recommended to copy the data onto physical tapes for long-term storage and store these at a suitable location outside of the company

Licenses

Certain functions of HP Data Protector to be used in the planning phase are specified On the basis of these considerations it is easy to determine the required number of functionalities and licenses The HP Storage Sizer tool is available to provide assistance The Storage Sizer tool contains the HP Data Protector software Sizer which can be called up separately

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Data Types Backup To Disk (daily)

Backup to Tape (weekly)

Infrastructure 500 GB 2500 GB

Management 1000 GB 5000 GB

BampR environment 500 GB 2500 GB

File Server 3000 GB 15000 GB

Mail Databases 5000 GB 25000 GB

Databases 2000 GB 10000 GB

Total 12000 GB 60000 GB

Growth Yearly 20 Backup to Tape (monthly) in TB

2014 240

2015 288

2016 346

2017 416

2018 500

9

This application can be used to plan your backup and recovery project The Data Protector environment can be licensed according to the traditional model (one license for each functionality) or the capacity-based model The tool is available to partners of HP

Tip If you do not know at the start of a project which functions of HP Data Protector are to be used all the functions of HP Data Protector can be tested free of charge for a period of 60 days within the framework of an evaluation The software can be downloaded at httpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

Data volume data growth sizing and backup times

To determine which hardware (servers SAN network tape libraries HP StoreOnce systems etc) are required for the backup and recovery environment it is important to know the size of the environment The existing data volume the data growth per year and the backup window all influence selection of the hardware to be deployed

The following table helps determine the data volumes to be backed up

If you know the rate of data growth the total backup volume can be calculated on the basis of the calculated data volume The table below clarifies that when the project is viewed over a period of five years you will want to double the data volume needs to be backed up at the end of the period To determine the right values for the future any examination or analysis should take account of this during planning of the backup and recovery environment

Note The tables are examples and must be viewed individually depending on the unique requirements of the organization

Backups are rarely carried out in the backup environment for 24 hours without interruption because during the day there is often the need to give priority to production applications Backups therefore usually take place outside of business hours in a so-called backup time window To determine the required hardware it is essential to know how much time is available for the backup and the volume of data to be backed up within this time For example if the time is not sufficient for backup onto a tape device the solution must be planned as larger or alternatives such as the snapshot-based backup on memory level (Zero Downtime Backup) must be considered

The HP Storage Sizer provides support in determining the required hardware It plans the right libraries and appropriate StoreOnce system The Sizer tool is available to partners of HP

Tip For successful implementation of a backup and recovery environment an examination of the data in external offices is just as important as information regarding the data in the headquarters For example if the data of the external office are to be replicated as deduplicated in the headquarters the necessary requirements with regard to required capacities for StoreOnce systems and libraries must be met in the headquarters right at the start of the project

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

10

Requirements and recommendations for the HP Data Protector Cell Server

The hardware requirements for HP Data Protector are described in the Quickspecs (link at the end of the document) In addition to the main memory that the operating system requires HP Data Protector requires 256 MB main memory (512 MB recommended) for the Cell Manager For backup jobs running in parallel another 40 MB are required (assuming 10 backups running simultaneously this means 400 MB) 64 MB for the installation server 256 MB for the user interface and 64 MB (128 MB recommended) for the media agent In total and rounded up this totals a requirement of 15 GB main memory Initially there is no requirement in the Quickspecs regarding the number of processors However if the Cell Server is also to function simultaneously as media agent the following general formula applies 1 processor core per media agenttape device to be addressed

If the StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector is used the recommendation is to deploy another 4 to 6 processor cores and 6 GB main memory (exact formula can be found in the Quickspecs)

As a general minimum recommendation and as preparation for any future functions in the software the backup server should have at least 8 processor cores and at least 8 GB main memory Experience has shown that upgrading an existing server rarely makes good sense instead acquisition of the current HP ProLiant server model in each case is recommended

Tip During planning of the backup server attention should be paid to ensuring that the server is procured with more computing performance and main memory than required This allows within the framework of the lifecycle new functions in HP Data Protector that have higher hardware requirements can be integrated (for example integration of the StoreOnce software store)

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

On installation of the Cell Server you are asked which components are to be installed on the system As a rule the proposed selection is the right one for the Cell Server supplemented by the Disaster Recovery component This applies to HP Data Protector versions 7X and 8X

Note Before installation of the corresponding components the support matrices must be checked with regard to compatibility of the versions

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

11

Available components and their significance (depending on deployed version the selection can differ)

bullDisk Agent Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bull(General) Media Agent Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullNDMP Media Agent Supplements the general media agent to include functions for the backups of NDMP storage solutions

bullUser Interface Contains the user interface of HP Data Protector as well as the commands to be run on the command line

bullManager-of-Manager User Interface A special extension of the user interface required for management of a number of interconnected Cell Servers

bullJava User Interface ndash see User Interface Java-based This special user interface is no longer available for DP version 8X or higher

bullHP P9000 XP Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P9000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P6000 EVA SMI-S Agent Agent based on SMI-S standard for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P6000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P4000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P4000 (HP StoreVirtual) (= Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P10000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P10000 (HP 3PAR StoreServ) (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullMS Exchange Integration Enables backup of MS Exchange 2003 Stores

bullMS SQL Integration Enables backup of MS SQL servers via the lsquoVirtual Device Interfacersquo

bullMS SharePoint Integration Enables backup of MS SharePoint servers (ltversion 2007)

bullMS SharePoint Server 20072010 Integration Enables backup of the MS SharePoint farm

bullMS Exchange Server 2010 Integration2010 Enables backup of the databases of Microsoft Exchange 2010 and 2013 servers

bullSAP R3 Integration Agent for backup of SAP (Oracle) databases with BRtools (backint and rman)

bullSAP DB Integration Agent for backing up the MAXDBSAPDB database

bullSAP HANA Integration Agent for backing up SAP HANA in-memory database

bullOracle Integration Agent for backing up Oracle databases

bullSybase Integration Agent for backing up Sybase databases

bullInformix Integration Agent for backing up Informix databases

bullLotus Integration Enables backup of Lotus Notes databases (NSF)

bullDB2 Integration Agent for backing up DB2 databases

bullHP NNM Backup Integration Scripts for backup of an HP Network Node Manager implementation

bullMS Volume Shadow Copy Integration Enables backup of MS applications and file systems via the Microsoft VSS framework (for example MS Exchange 2007)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 2: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

2

Table of contents

HP Data Protector Overview 3

Steps for Successful Implementation 3

What data should be backed up 6

How where and with the deployment of what technology should the backup be created 7

Loss of Data Downtimes 7

Retention Periods 8

Licenses 8

Data Volume Data Growth Sizing and Backup Times 9

Requirements and Recommendations for HP Data Protector Cell Server 10

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose 10

What is patch bundle and what order is required for the updates 12

How is the DP software installed on the server that requires a backup 13

File lsquoglobalrsquo 13

File omnirc omnirc 14

Block Size 16

Segment Size 17

Disk Agent Buffers 18

Concurrency Multiplexing 18

Multi-streaming 19

Null Device 20

LAN vs SAN Backups 21

Tools 22

Jukebox 24

File Library 24

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication 25

Evaluations in HP Data Protector 25

Notifications in HP Data Protector 26

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions 26

External Tools 26

Purge 27

Recovery Tests and Disaster Recovery 28

Glossary 29

Appendix A ndash Speeds 31

Additional Sources of Information 32

LAN

GUI

Manager of Managers

Cell Managers

Internal Database

Media Devices LibrariesFiles Versions Atributes

Backup-Agent(Disk-Agent)

Application-Agent(Online-Agent)

Media-Agent

Backup to Tape

UserApplication

Backup to Disk

Zero Downtime Backup and Instant Recovery

Backup to Virtual Tape Catalyst Store

ControlData

HP Data Protector architecture

3

HP Data Protector overview

The diagram below describes the concept and functions of HP Data Protector showing both the data streams and control paths of the software Refer to the glossary at the end of the guide for explanations about the terms used in the diagram

Steps for a successful implementation

A successful implementation of a backup and recovery strategy requires you to consider many factors The points listed below are based on experience from a practical application collected from many customers (SMBs and corporate groups) examining major aspects from planning to regular operation The steps are divided into logical groups so you can easily use this document as a reference for your own implementation of HP Data Protector (referred to in this guide as DP)

Note The details specified apply mostly to a Microsoft Windows environment but are applicable to other settings and approaches and can be used as a template for further improvement in your own environment

Backup and recovery strategyA stable and functioning backup and recovery environment is a critical part of a high-performing organization With a solid data backup system in place when loss of data occurs it can be restored within a previously defined timeframe regardless of the cause inadvertently or deliberately deleted corrupted due to errors in applications a hacker attack data lost due to hardware errors or other reasons Another aspect of backup and recovery is the necessity to restore historical data for example due to legally prescribed requirements

Regular backups are a simple form of disaster preparedness Backups alone however are not a disaster recovery plan The infrastructure of your organization also has to be examined For instance consider the following

bull Do you have an alternative data center

bull Are critical applications configured in a cluster

bull Is the network connection configured as redundant

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

4

As part of a solid backup and recovery program it is recommended that you integrate your company strategy with a disaster recovery plan that support the necessary backup and recovery requirements availabilities storage and hardware redundancies that meets your unique needs

When considering your backup and recovery strategy and as you perform a detailed analysis of your infrastructure consider the following points should therefore be examined intensively

bull What data should be backed up

bull How where and using what technology should the backup be created

bull How much data loss is tolerable (RPO) and what are your acceptable downtimes (RTO)

bull What are your data retention periods

Planning and preparation Ensuring the optimal implementation of a Data Protector environment requires detailed planning and preparation The planning starts with the selection of the operating system for the installation of HP Data Protector Cell Manager The Cell Manager is available for Linux HP-UX and Microsoft Windows The 64-bit variant of each operating system is preferred because it enables you to use the advanced options of HP Data Protector In the case of Microsoft MS Windows Server 2012 or 2012R2 is preferred The DP Cell Servers can also be installed in a cluster environment making it faster to entrust the protection of mission-critical data to a redundantly configured backup solution

Other aspects to consider in the planning phase bull Licenses

bull Data volume data growth scope of the infrastructure backup times (backup window)

bull Requirements and recommendations for the Cell Server

Installation and updateOnce the preparatory planning work for the backup and recovery environment has been completed you can install the Cell Server The process for installation is automated and can be completed in a few minutes

Sign in here to get supporthttpssoftwaresupporthpcomgroupsoftwaresupporthome

A few questions that may arise during and after the installation

bull Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

bull What is a patch bundle and in what order do you load the updates

bull How do you install the DP software on the server that requires a backup

ConfigurationOnce the installation of HP Data Protector is completed the solution is now ready in principle for deployment Drives can be set up pools can be defined media can be formatted backups can be set up and executed But there are a few areas that still require configuration as follows

HP Data Protector is installed with the so-called default settings which are valid for virtually any environment without any further adjustment Nonetheless in practice it is often advisable to change the Data Protector configuration files to your own environment as these can for example contain limitations with the corresponding individual customization or significantly influence the performance of the system

While descriptions of all the parameters are not included in this guide you can refer to detailed descriptions in the configuration files and help files andor the HP Data Protector manuals The following paragraphs will provide a few recommendations from practical application

The customisable files are lsquoglobarsquol and lsquoomnircrsquo (Linux Unix omnirc)

bullglobal The parameters in this file affect the entire environment managed by this Data Protector Cell Manager For example a change made to the timeout setting here will apply it to the entire environment managed under this Cell Manager Important to remember and in some cases necessary parameters are described in the second section of the guide

bullomnirc The options in this file only affect the individual client for which backup is configured In general it is recommended only to change the settings in this file if required by the environment The second section of the guide explains why customization is necessary for most environments and which parameters can be configured

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

5

Performance Performance tests should be considered part of the installation process for every Data Protector implementation They document the status of the environment to be backed up and reveal possible bottlenecks in the infrastructure The documentation of the conditions and results of the performance tests enables a comparison in the event of later repetition allowing conclusions to be drawn regarding the performance of the infrastructure Performance tests also enable optimal adjustment of the backup and recovery implementation to the circumstances of the environment because theory and practice do not always match up 100

The following points are relevant to the execution of the performance tests The combination of all the functions described allow you to enhance the overall performance of your backups

bullBlock size All drives (physical and virtual tape drives as well as backup-to-disk drives) are set up in HP Data Protector with a default block size For DP versions 7X the default value is 64 kB and for version 8X the default value is 256 kB As a rule increasing the size to 256 kB (DP versions lt 8X or for HP-UX) or 512 kB enhances the data throughput to the connected devices

bullSegment size When setting up new devices in HP Data Protector a default segment size is specified depending on the media type used As a rule increasing the segment size also increases the data throughput and also the speed of the data backup Depending on the media type that is used the size should be increased gradually

bullDiskagentbuffers Disk agent buffers have no direct influence on the overall performance of the backup but in the case of network backups they can lead to a constant data flow on the media agent The value 16 for this parameter has proven effective in practice

bullConcurrencymultiplexing On setting up the drives a default concurrency is specified depending on the media type that is used this value is often too low for the environment Raising it to 10 for example can considerably increase the backup speed and reduce the total duration of the backup As a rule a higher concurrency ensures better supply of the tape drive with data to be backed up

bullMulti-streaming Although the concurrency can be set when creating a backup specification only one disk agent per mount point is started during the backup In the case of very comprehensive mount points this can lead to a bottleneck during the data backup The individual configuration of multi-streaming can significantly enhance the performance of the backup for the individual mount points

bullNull device The null device describes a special drive type through which the maximum speed of a backup can be determined Furthermore the null device provides the possibility to test the settings for drives and identify possible bottlenecks in the environment

bullLAN vs SAN backups The SAN backup is preferred and allows you to make effective use of tape drive resources High bandwidths are required for backups via network (key word trunk or 10 GbE) to be able to take a tape device to the saturation limit

bullTools Various tools are available for performance analysis for example HPReadData HPCreateData and as a complete package HP LTT (Library and Tape Tools)

Backup-to-disk technologies Disk-based backup targets (backup-to-disk) offer fast and reliable ways to recover data HP Data Protector offers a continuum of backup target options that can be implemented as part of a recovery chain Those options are Data Protector Smart Cache traditional disk-based backup appliances (example StoreOnce and Data Domain appliances) tape and cloud

The following backup-to-disk technologies are available

bull Jukebox

bull File Library

bull B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

bull Data Protector Smart Cache

Documentation and reporting Once the backup and recovery environment is fully installed and the backups are running in daily operation you might think that the job is done But it isnrsquot An essential point for the implementation is still missing documentation of the environment

Good documentation of the environment is a requirement for successful recovery in the event of a disaster The documentation should contain at least the server names IP addresses mount points and directories to be backed up priorities and order for the recovery (example 1 MS Active Directory 2 DNS 3 MS Exchange) maximum recovery time maximum loss of data and the data volumes to be backed up

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

6

Optionally reporting can be used to record and document the data growth of the backups A schematic diagram of the environment helps other employees in the company to obtain quick insight into the environment An emergency handbook might include among other things the description of processes and responsibilities to help ensure efficient procedures in the event of a disaster

Other possibilities for documentation include

bull Creating reports in HP Data Protector

bull Creating notifications in HP Data Protector

bull Connectivity to monitoring solutions which helps to detect and document problems at an early stage

bull Documentation of the environment with external tools

bull The use of HP Backup Navigator an interactive web-based reporting and analytics application for the entire Data Protector environment

MaintenanceWith successful operation of the backup and recovery solution and with steady growth of the environment the Data Protector installation can be faced with new challenges However in many cases the data center environment changes unpredictably as additional workloads are added or data grows faster than originally expected which can result in insufficient backup windows to complete the backup task In these cases regular maintenance dates should be scheduled Depending on the size of the environment maintenance dates should set quarterly to twice a year The objective of the maintenance is to proactively assess the state of the backup environment and fine-tune Data Protector parameters for optimal backup and recovery performance

The following activities should be included in a maintenance date

bullPurge A purge of the internal database helps to remove entries that are no longer required and ultimately ensures consistent good performance of the backup environment This task is performed automatically with HP Data Protector version 8X For HP Data Protector versions 6 and 7 the purge is a necessary task to clean up and defragment the internal database

bullClean-up The reality with any implementation is that the environment changes new clients are installed and servers are decommissioned Often clients that no longer exist are not removed from the Data Protector configuration This is particularly noticeable for example when you want to create new SQL backups in the user interface of Data Protector and results in the user interface running slowly As a rule the cause of this is a check of the name resolution for the backup clients being carried out in the background This causes a timeout for systems that no longer exist and leads to significantly slower characteristics of the user interface Regular detection and maintenance of the backup client is therefore advisable

bullPatches A maintenance date or times in which a no backup is carried out are good opportunities for the installation of new updates This allows problems to be remedied and new functions to be enabled A requirement for installation of the updates is a valid maintenance agreement Furthermore support packs for the server and updates of the firmware for the server and tape library can also be installed in this period Also the HP Library and Tape Tools are available to use to update the firmware of HP libraries

bullRecovery tests and disaster recovery Within the framework of maintenance the recovery of files and servers should be verified at regular intervals to provide greater security and assurance in the event of serious incidents

bullDocumentation Within the framework of maintenance it is a good idea to verify and adapt the existing documentation of the backup environment Moreover if present the emergency handbook can be revised and supplemented in the course of performing these other tasks The BRICK tool can also be used to record the ACTUAL state of the Data Protector environment on the maintenance date and store it as documentation

What data should be backed up

The answer to this question depends on the requirements for the environment In principle everything should be backed up including the system state Only individual files or directories should be taken out of the backup by means of exclusion rules In general it applies that a backup must contain at least the data that are necessary for recovery of the application on the system In the case of an MS SQL server this involves at least a backup of the databases and the transactions and the settings of the SQL server The operating system could for example also be restored by rolling out a prepared operating system template with the deployment of virtual machines

Making decisions about backing up data by an individual server is typically inadequate In a company there can be business processes that are mapped on a number of servers For example if the company operates a web service to be able to offer customers spare parts ordering the web service does not consist only of the web server As a rule the

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

7

operation of the web service also requires connectivity to the internet DNS credit checks possibly an Active Directory possibly a file server and a CRM solution In case of a disaster the entire service must therefore be examined and its data backed up andor safeguarded against failures

Tip In many cases only the central location of the company is examined A backup and recovery strategy for external offices should also be a constituent part of the definition With HP Data Protector and the integrated deduplication technologies or the HP StoreOnce system external offices can be easily included in the overall data protection strategy

How where and what technology should be used to create the backup

HP Data Protector provides a broad spectrum of options to safeguard mission-critical data against disaster A few examples of the possibilities are provided below

bullIntegrations The backup of applications and databases takes place by means of a special agent which ensures that applications are placed in a calm state (backup state) to enable application-consistent data backup In the event of a disaster the application can then be restored including transactions In the case of virtualized environments the complete virtual machine and with the Microsoft VSS framework also the application (for example MS Exchange) can be backed up in the virtual machine by means of the integration

bullDisk staging This is a technology where the data are first of all cached on a hard disk area before they are copied onto a physical tape in a downstream process With simultaneous integration of deduplication a greater number of backups can be kept Disk staging is suitable primarily for backups with a short retention period as with intermediate storage and for rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullIncremental forever Incremental forever refers to a special process in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup Here the backup takes place partially or completely on a hard disk area with regular consolidations of the data stocks ensuring rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullDeduplication Deduplication refers to a method of detecting and removing redundancies on block level during the backup when the blocks to be backed up are compared with blocks that have already been backed up This method is holistically integrated into the HP portfolio (HP StoreOnce systems and HP Data Protector) and permits for example complete integration of the external offices into the central backup and recovery strategy of a company

Tip The combination of the different technologies in HP Data Protector provides comprehensive flexibility and optimal support for the company in the possible event of a disaster

Loss of datadowntimes

The extent of loss of data and acceptable recovery times should be determined individually for each system or each service of the company The type and frequency of backups in HP Data Protector can be derived from the data obtained

Tip Please note that patching and upgrading Data Protector doesnrsquot create any downtime

Explanations of some key terms are provided below

bull Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the maximum loss of data in the event of a failure As a rule it is the time interval between two backups This value specifies the maximum volume of transactions or data that can be lost between the last backup and a possible case of disaster

bull Recovery Time Objective (RTO) refers to the agreed recovery time and as a rule is the period between occurrence of a disaster and recovery of the business processes Possible additional activities can be

ndash Hardware provision and recovery of the infrastructure

ndash Connection and configuration of the hardware on the network

ndash Recovery of the operating system

ndash Installation of the backup client software

ndash Identification of the data and information to be reloaded

ndash Identification of the required backup medium and its provision

ndash Data recovery from tape

ndash Recovery of databases

ndash Test and share of the reloaded data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Disaster

LogicalPhysicalHardware (server)SAN switchFirewallNetworkStorageData center (powercooling)

Data deletionData corruptionHuman errorFW updatespatchesSabotage

8

bull The illustration shows an example of how a failure (case of disaster) can occur and what causes it

Tip A list of all servers and services of the company with evaluation of the priorities data volumes backup frequencies and recovery times should be a constituent part of every disaster recovery plan

Retention periods

The retention period refers to the period in which data must be available for recovery With HP Data Protector there are various possibilities for configuring the protection period of a backup ranging from no protection period at all to days weeks months and yearsmdashall the way to permanent protection of the data HP Data Protector is therefore also ideal for long-term data archival though it should not be confused with an archiving solution

For example the legal regulations in Germany based on the type of data (for example documents with significance for tax invoices and annual accounts) and industry sector (for example medical data) range from 6 10 or 20 years up to permanent retention Every company is under obligation to implement and comply with the regulations applicable to that company

Tip To protect against inadvertent overwriting of the tapes (human error) or destruction of the data due to sabotage it is recommended to copy the data onto physical tapes for long-term storage and store these at a suitable location outside of the company

Licenses

Certain functions of HP Data Protector to be used in the planning phase are specified On the basis of these considerations it is easy to determine the required number of functionalities and licenses The HP Storage Sizer tool is available to provide assistance The Storage Sizer tool contains the HP Data Protector software Sizer which can be called up separately

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Data Types Backup To Disk (daily)

Backup to Tape (weekly)

Infrastructure 500 GB 2500 GB

Management 1000 GB 5000 GB

BampR environment 500 GB 2500 GB

File Server 3000 GB 15000 GB

Mail Databases 5000 GB 25000 GB

Databases 2000 GB 10000 GB

Total 12000 GB 60000 GB

Growth Yearly 20 Backup to Tape (monthly) in TB

2014 240

2015 288

2016 346

2017 416

2018 500

9

This application can be used to plan your backup and recovery project The Data Protector environment can be licensed according to the traditional model (one license for each functionality) or the capacity-based model The tool is available to partners of HP

Tip If you do not know at the start of a project which functions of HP Data Protector are to be used all the functions of HP Data Protector can be tested free of charge for a period of 60 days within the framework of an evaluation The software can be downloaded at httpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

Data volume data growth sizing and backup times

To determine which hardware (servers SAN network tape libraries HP StoreOnce systems etc) are required for the backup and recovery environment it is important to know the size of the environment The existing data volume the data growth per year and the backup window all influence selection of the hardware to be deployed

The following table helps determine the data volumes to be backed up

If you know the rate of data growth the total backup volume can be calculated on the basis of the calculated data volume The table below clarifies that when the project is viewed over a period of five years you will want to double the data volume needs to be backed up at the end of the period To determine the right values for the future any examination or analysis should take account of this during planning of the backup and recovery environment

Note The tables are examples and must be viewed individually depending on the unique requirements of the organization

Backups are rarely carried out in the backup environment for 24 hours without interruption because during the day there is often the need to give priority to production applications Backups therefore usually take place outside of business hours in a so-called backup time window To determine the required hardware it is essential to know how much time is available for the backup and the volume of data to be backed up within this time For example if the time is not sufficient for backup onto a tape device the solution must be planned as larger or alternatives such as the snapshot-based backup on memory level (Zero Downtime Backup) must be considered

The HP Storage Sizer provides support in determining the required hardware It plans the right libraries and appropriate StoreOnce system The Sizer tool is available to partners of HP

Tip For successful implementation of a backup and recovery environment an examination of the data in external offices is just as important as information regarding the data in the headquarters For example if the data of the external office are to be replicated as deduplicated in the headquarters the necessary requirements with regard to required capacities for StoreOnce systems and libraries must be met in the headquarters right at the start of the project

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

10

Requirements and recommendations for the HP Data Protector Cell Server

The hardware requirements for HP Data Protector are described in the Quickspecs (link at the end of the document) In addition to the main memory that the operating system requires HP Data Protector requires 256 MB main memory (512 MB recommended) for the Cell Manager For backup jobs running in parallel another 40 MB are required (assuming 10 backups running simultaneously this means 400 MB) 64 MB for the installation server 256 MB for the user interface and 64 MB (128 MB recommended) for the media agent In total and rounded up this totals a requirement of 15 GB main memory Initially there is no requirement in the Quickspecs regarding the number of processors However if the Cell Server is also to function simultaneously as media agent the following general formula applies 1 processor core per media agenttape device to be addressed

If the StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector is used the recommendation is to deploy another 4 to 6 processor cores and 6 GB main memory (exact formula can be found in the Quickspecs)

As a general minimum recommendation and as preparation for any future functions in the software the backup server should have at least 8 processor cores and at least 8 GB main memory Experience has shown that upgrading an existing server rarely makes good sense instead acquisition of the current HP ProLiant server model in each case is recommended

Tip During planning of the backup server attention should be paid to ensuring that the server is procured with more computing performance and main memory than required This allows within the framework of the lifecycle new functions in HP Data Protector that have higher hardware requirements can be integrated (for example integration of the StoreOnce software store)

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

On installation of the Cell Server you are asked which components are to be installed on the system As a rule the proposed selection is the right one for the Cell Server supplemented by the Disaster Recovery component This applies to HP Data Protector versions 7X and 8X

Note Before installation of the corresponding components the support matrices must be checked with regard to compatibility of the versions

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

11

Available components and their significance (depending on deployed version the selection can differ)

bullDisk Agent Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bull(General) Media Agent Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullNDMP Media Agent Supplements the general media agent to include functions for the backups of NDMP storage solutions

bullUser Interface Contains the user interface of HP Data Protector as well as the commands to be run on the command line

bullManager-of-Manager User Interface A special extension of the user interface required for management of a number of interconnected Cell Servers

bullJava User Interface ndash see User Interface Java-based This special user interface is no longer available for DP version 8X or higher

bullHP P9000 XP Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P9000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P6000 EVA SMI-S Agent Agent based on SMI-S standard for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P6000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P4000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P4000 (HP StoreVirtual) (= Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P10000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P10000 (HP 3PAR StoreServ) (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullMS Exchange Integration Enables backup of MS Exchange 2003 Stores

bullMS SQL Integration Enables backup of MS SQL servers via the lsquoVirtual Device Interfacersquo

bullMS SharePoint Integration Enables backup of MS SharePoint servers (ltversion 2007)

bullMS SharePoint Server 20072010 Integration Enables backup of the MS SharePoint farm

bullMS Exchange Server 2010 Integration2010 Enables backup of the databases of Microsoft Exchange 2010 and 2013 servers

bullSAP R3 Integration Agent for backup of SAP (Oracle) databases with BRtools (backint and rman)

bullSAP DB Integration Agent for backing up the MAXDBSAPDB database

bullSAP HANA Integration Agent for backing up SAP HANA in-memory database

bullOracle Integration Agent for backing up Oracle databases

bullSybase Integration Agent for backing up Sybase databases

bullInformix Integration Agent for backing up Informix databases

bullLotus Integration Enables backup of Lotus Notes databases (NSF)

bullDB2 Integration Agent for backing up DB2 databases

bullHP NNM Backup Integration Scripts for backup of an HP Network Node Manager implementation

bullMS Volume Shadow Copy Integration Enables backup of MS applications and file systems via the Microsoft VSS framework (for example MS Exchange 2007)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 3: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

LAN

GUI

Manager of Managers

Cell Managers

Internal Database

Media Devices LibrariesFiles Versions Atributes

Backup-Agent(Disk-Agent)

Application-Agent(Online-Agent)

Media-Agent

Backup to Tape

UserApplication

Backup to Disk

Zero Downtime Backup and Instant Recovery

Backup to Virtual Tape Catalyst Store

ControlData

HP Data Protector architecture

3

HP Data Protector overview

The diagram below describes the concept and functions of HP Data Protector showing both the data streams and control paths of the software Refer to the glossary at the end of the guide for explanations about the terms used in the diagram

Steps for a successful implementation

A successful implementation of a backup and recovery strategy requires you to consider many factors The points listed below are based on experience from a practical application collected from many customers (SMBs and corporate groups) examining major aspects from planning to regular operation The steps are divided into logical groups so you can easily use this document as a reference for your own implementation of HP Data Protector (referred to in this guide as DP)

Note The details specified apply mostly to a Microsoft Windows environment but are applicable to other settings and approaches and can be used as a template for further improvement in your own environment

Backup and recovery strategyA stable and functioning backup and recovery environment is a critical part of a high-performing organization With a solid data backup system in place when loss of data occurs it can be restored within a previously defined timeframe regardless of the cause inadvertently or deliberately deleted corrupted due to errors in applications a hacker attack data lost due to hardware errors or other reasons Another aspect of backup and recovery is the necessity to restore historical data for example due to legally prescribed requirements

Regular backups are a simple form of disaster preparedness Backups alone however are not a disaster recovery plan The infrastructure of your organization also has to be examined For instance consider the following

bull Do you have an alternative data center

bull Are critical applications configured in a cluster

bull Is the network connection configured as redundant

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

4

As part of a solid backup and recovery program it is recommended that you integrate your company strategy with a disaster recovery plan that support the necessary backup and recovery requirements availabilities storage and hardware redundancies that meets your unique needs

When considering your backup and recovery strategy and as you perform a detailed analysis of your infrastructure consider the following points should therefore be examined intensively

bull What data should be backed up

bull How where and using what technology should the backup be created

bull How much data loss is tolerable (RPO) and what are your acceptable downtimes (RTO)

bull What are your data retention periods

Planning and preparation Ensuring the optimal implementation of a Data Protector environment requires detailed planning and preparation The planning starts with the selection of the operating system for the installation of HP Data Protector Cell Manager The Cell Manager is available for Linux HP-UX and Microsoft Windows The 64-bit variant of each operating system is preferred because it enables you to use the advanced options of HP Data Protector In the case of Microsoft MS Windows Server 2012 or 2012R2 is preferred The DP Cell Servers can also be installed in a cluster environment making it faster to entrust the protection of mission-critical data to a redundantly configured backup solution

Other aspects to consider in the planning phase bull Licenses

bull Data volume data growth scope of the infrastructure backup times (backup window)

bull Requirements and recommendations for the Cell Server

Installation and updateOnce the preparatory planning work for the backup and recovery environment has been completed you can install the Cell Server The process for installation is automated and can be completed in a few minutes

Sign in here to get supporthttpssoftwaresupporthpcomgroupsoftwaresupporthome

A few questions that may arise during and after the installation

bull Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

bull What is a patch bundle and in what order do you load the updates

bull How do you install the DP software on the server that requires a backup

ConfigurationOnce the installation of HP Data Protector is completed the solution is now ready in principle for deployment Drives can be set up pools can be defined media can be formatted backups can be set up and executed But there are a few areas that still require configuration as follows

HP Data Protector is installed with the so-called default settings which are valid for virtually any environment without any further adjustment Nonetheless in practice it is often advisable to change the Data Protector configuration files to your own environment as these can for example contain limitations with the corresponding individual customization or significantly influence the performance of the system

While descriptions of all the parameters are not included in this guide you can refer to detailed descriptions in the configuration files and help files andor the HP Data Protector manuals The following paragraphs will provide a few recommendations from practical application

The customisable files are lsquoglobarsquol and lsquoomnircrsquo (Linux Unix omnirc)

bullglobal The parameters in this file affect the entire environment managed by this Data Protector Cell Manager For example a change made to the timeout setting here will apply it to the entire environment managed under this Cell Manager Important to remember and in some cases necessary parameters are described in the second section of the guide

bullomnirc The options in this file only affect the individual client for which backup is configured In general it is recommended only to change the settings in this file if required by the environment The second section of the guide explains why customization is necessary for most environments and which parameters can be configured

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

5

Performance Performance tests should be considered part of the installation process for every Data Protector implementation They document the status of the environment to be backed up and reveal possible bottlenecks in the infrastructure The documentation of the conditions and results of the performance tests enables a comparison in the event of later repetition allowing conclusions to be drawn regarding the performance of the infrastructure Performance tests also enable optimal adjustment of the backup and recovery implementation to the circumstances of the environment because theory and practice do not always match up 100

The following points are relevant to the execution of the performance tests The combination of all the functions described allow you to enhance the overall performance of your backups

bullBlock size All drives (physical and virtual tape drives as well as backup-to-disk drives) are set up in HP Data Protector with a default block size For DP versions 7X the default value is 64 kB and for version 8X the default value is 256 kB As a rule increasing the size to 256 kB (DP versions lt 8X or for HP-UX) or 512 kB enhances the data throughput to the connected devices

bullSegment size When setting up new devices in HP Data Protector a default segment size is specified depending on the media type used As a rule increasing the segment size also increases the data throughput and also the speed of the data backup Depending on the media type that is used the size should be increased gradually

bullDiskagentbuffers Disk agent buffers have no direct influence on the overall performance of the backup but in the case of network backups they can lead to a constant data flow on the media agent The value 16 for this parameter has proven effective in practice

bullConcurrencymultiplexing On setting up the drives a default concurrency is specified depending on the media type that is used this value is often too low for the environment Raising it to 10 for example can considerably increase the backup speed and reduce the total duration of the backup As a rule a higher concurrency ensures better supply of the tape drive with data to be backed up

bullMulti-streaming Although the concurrency can be set when creating a backup specification only one disk agent per mount point is started during the backup In the case of very comprehensive mount points this can lead to a bottleneck during the data backup The individual configuration of multi-streaming can significantly enhance the performance of the backup for the individual mount points

bullNull device The null device describes a special drive type through which the maximum speed of a backup can be determined Furthermore the null device provides the possibility to test the settings for drives and identify possible bottlenecks in the environment

bullLAN vs SAN backups The SAN backup is preferred and allows you to make effective use of tape drive resources High bandwidths are required for backups via network (key word trunk or 10 GbE) to be able to take a tape device to the saturation limit

bullTools Various tools are available for performance analysis for example HPReadData HPCreateData and as a complete package HP LTT (Library and Tape Tools)

Backup-to-disk technologies Disk-based backup targets (backup-to-disk) offer fast and reliable ways to recover data HP Data Protector offers a continuum of backup target options that can be implemented as part of a recovery chain Those options are Data Protector Smart Cache traditional disk-based backup appliances (example StoreOnce and Data Domain appliances) tape and cloud

The following backup-to-disk technologies are available

bull Jukebox

bull File Library

bull B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

bull Data Protector Smart Cache

Documentation and reporting Once the backup and recovery environment is fully installed and the backups are running in daily operation you might think that the job is done But it isnrsquot An essential point for the implementation is still missing documentation of the environment

Good documentation of the environment is a requirement for successful recovery in the event of a disaster The documentation should contain at least the server names IP addresses mount points and directories to be backed up priorities and order for the recovery (example 1 MS Active Directory 2 DNS 3 MS Exchange) maximum recovery time maximum loss of data and the data volumes to be backed up

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

6

Optionally reporting can be used to record and document the data growth of the backups A schematic diagram of the environment helps other employees in the company to obtain quick insight into the environment An emergency handbook might include among other things the description of processes and responsibilities to help ensure efficient procedures in the event of a disaster

Other possibilities for documentation include

bull Creating reports in HP Data Protector

bull Creating notifications in HP Data Protector

bull Connectivity to monitoring solutions which helps to detect and document problems at an early stage

bull Documentation of the environment with external tools

bull The use of HP Backup Navigator an interactive web-based reporting and analytics application for the entire Data Protector environment

MaintenanceWith successful operation of the backup and recovery solution and with steady growth of the environment the Data Protector installation can be faced with new challenges However in many cases the data center environment changes unpredictably as additional workloads are added or data grows faster than originally expected which can result in insufficient backup windows to complete the backup task In these cases regular maintenance dates should be scheduled Depending on the size of the environment maintenance dates should set quarterly to twice a year The objective of the maintenance is to proactively assess the state of the backup environment and fine-tune Data Protector parameters for optimal backup and recovery performance

The following activities should be included in a maintenance date

bullPurge A purge of the internal database helps to remove entries that are no longer required and ultimately ensures consistent good performance of the backup environment This task is performed automatically with HP Data Protector version 8X For HP Data Protector versions 6 and 7 the purge is a necessary task to clean up and defragment the internal database

bullClean-up The reality with any implementation is that the environment changes new clients are installed and servers are decommissioned Often clients that no longer exist are not removed from the Data Protector configuration This is particularly noticeable for example when you want to create new SQL backups in the user interface of Data Protector and results in the user interface running slowly As a rule the cause of this is a check of the name resolution for the backup clients being carried out in the background This causes a timeout for systems that no longer exist and leads to significantly slower characteristics of the user interface Regular detection and maintenance of the backup client is therefore advisable

bullPatches A maintenance date or times in which a no backup is carried out are good opportunities for the installation of new updates This allows problems to be remedied and new functions to be enabled A requirement for installation of the updates is a valid maintenance agreement Furthermore support packs for the server and updates of the firmware for the server and tape library can also be installed in this period Also the HP Library and Tape Tools are available to use to update the firmware of HP libraries

bullRecovery tests and disaster recovery Within the framework of maintenance the recovery of files and servers should be verified at regular intervals to provide greater security and assurance in the event of serious incidents

bullDocumentation Within the framework of maintenance it is a good idea to verify and adapt the existing documentation of the backup environment Moreover if present the emergency handbook can be revised and supplemented in the course of performing these other tasks The BRICK tool can also be used to record the ACTUAL state of the Data Protector environment on the maintenance date and store it as documentation

What data should be backed up

The answer to this question depends on the requirements for the environment In principle everything should be backed up including the system state Only individual files or directories should be taken out of the backup by means of exclusion rules In general it applies that a backup must contain at least the data that are necessary for recovery of the application on the system In the case of an MS SQL server this involves at least a backup of the databases and the transactions and the settings of the SQL server The operating system could for example also be restored by rolling out a prepared operating system template with the deployment of virtual machines

Making decisions about backing up data by an individual server is typically inadequate In a company there can be business processes that are mapped on a number of servers For example if the company operates a web service to be able to offer customers spare parts ordering the web service does not consist only of the web server As a rule the

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

7

operation of the web service also requires connectivity to the internet DNS credit checks possibly an Active Directory possibly a file server and a CRM solution In case of a disaster the entire service must therefore be examined and its data backed up andor safeguarded against failures

Tip In many cases only the central location of the company is examined A backup and recovery strategy for external offices should also be a constituent part of the definition With HP Data Protector and the integrated deduplication technologies or the HP StoreOnce system external offices can be easily included in the overall data protection strategy

How where and what technology should be used to create the backup

HP Data Protector provides a broad spectrum of options to safeguard mission-critical data against disaster A few examples of the possibilities are provided below

bullIntegrations The backup of applications and databases takes place by means of a special agent which ensures that applications are placed in a calm state (backup state) to enable application-consistent data backup In the event of a disaster the application can then be restored including transactions In the case of virtualized environments the complete virtual machine and with the Microsoft VSS framework also the application (for example MS Exchange) can be backed up in the virtual machine by means of the integration

bullDisk staging This is a technology where the data are first of all cached on a hard disk area before they are copied onto a physical tape in a downstream process With simultaneous integration of deduplication a greater number of backups can be kept Disk staging is suitable primarily for backups with a short retention period as with intermediate storage and for rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullIncremental forever Incremental forever refers to a special process in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup Here the backup takes place partially or completely on a hard disk area with regular consolidations of the data stocks ensuring rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullDeduplication Deduplication refers to a method of detecting and removing redundancies on block level during the backup when the blocks to be backed up are compared with blocks that have already been backed up This method is holistically integrated into the HP portfolio (HP StoreOnce systems and HP Data Protector) and permits for example complete integration of the external offices into the central backup and recovery strategy of a company

Tip The combination of the different technologies in HP Data Protector provides comprehensive flexibility and optimal support for the company in the possible event of a disaster

Loss of datadowntimes

The extent of loss of data and acceptable recovery times should be determined individually for each system or each service of the company The type and frequency of backups in HP Data Protector can be derived from the data obtained

Tip Please note that patching and upgrading Data Protector doesnrsquot create any downtime

Explanations of some key terms are provided below

bull Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the maximum loss of data in the event of a failure As a rule it is the time interval between two backups This value specifies the maximum volume of transactions or data that can be lost between the last backup and a possible case of disaster

bull Recovery Time Objective (RTO) refers to the agreed recovery time and as a rule is the period between occurrence of a disaster and recovery of the business processes Possible additional activities can be

ndash Hardware provision and recovery of the infrastructure

ndash Connection and configuration of the hardware on the network

ndash Recovery of the operating system

ndash Installation of the backup client software

ndash Identification of the data and information to be reloaded

ndash Identification of the required backup medium and its provision

ndash Data recovery from tape

ndash Recovery of databases

ndash Test and share of the reloaded data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Disaster

LogicalPhysicalHardware (server)SAN switchFirewallNetworkStorageData center (powercooling)

Data deletionData corruptionHuman errorFW updatespatchesSabotage

8

bull The illustration shows an example of how a failure (case of disaster) can occur and what causes it

Tip A list of all servers and services of the company with evaluation of the priorities data volumes backup frequencies and recovery times should be a constituent part of every disaster recovery plan

Retention periods

The retention period refers to the period in which data must be available for recovery With HP Data Protector there are various possibilities for configuring the protection period of a backup ranging from no protection period at all to days weeks months and yearsmdashall the way to permanent protection of the data HP Data Protector is therefore also ideal for long-term data archival though it should not be confused with an archiving solution

For example the legal regulations in Germany based on the type of data (for example documents with significance for tax invoices and annual accounts) and industry sector (for example medical data) range from 6 10 or 20 years up to permanent retention Every company is under obligation to implement and comply with the regulations applicable to that company

Tip To protect against inadvertent overwriting of the tapes (human error) or destruction of the data due to sabotage it is recommended to copy the data onto physical tapes for long-term storage and store these at a suitable location outside of the company

Licenses

Certain functions of HP Data Protector to be used in the planning phase are specified On the basis of these considerations it is easy to determine the required number of functionalities and licenses The HP Storage Sizer tool is available to provide assistance The Storage Sizer tool contains the HP Data Protector software Sizer which can be called up separately

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Data Types Backup To Disk (daily)

Backup to Tape (weekly)

Infrastructure 500 GB 2500 GB

Management 1000 GB 5000 GB

BampR environment 500 GB 2500 GB

File Server 3000 GB 15000 GB

Mail Databases 5000 GB 25000 GB

Databases 2000 GB 10000 GB

Total 12000 GB 60000 GB

Growth Yearly 20 Backup to Tape (monthly) in TB

2014 240

2015 288

2016 346

2017 416

2018 500

9

This application can be used to plan your backup and recovery project The Data Protector environment can be licensed according to the traditional model (one license for each functionality) or the capacity-based model The tool is available to partners of HP

Tip If you do not know at the start of a project which functions of HP Data Protector are to be used all the functions of HP Data Protector can be tested free of charge for a period of 60 days within the framework of an evaluation The software can be downloaded at httpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

Data volume data growth sizing and backup times

To determine which hardware (servers SAN network tape libraries HP StoreOnce systems etc) are required for the backup and recovery environment it is important to know the size of the environment The existing data volume the data growth per year and the backup window all influence selection of the hardware to be deployed

The following table helps determine the data volumes to be backed up

If you know the rate of data growth the total backup volume can be calculated on the basis of the calculated data volume The table below clarifies that when the project is viewed over a period of five years you will want to double the data volume needs to be backed up at the end of the period To determine the right values for the future any examination or analysis should take account of this during planning of the backup and recovery environment

Note The tables are examples and must be viewed individually depending on the unique requirements of the organization

Backups are rarely carried out in the backup environment for 24 hours without interruption because during the day there is often the need to give priority to production applications Backups therefore usually take place outside of business hours in a so-called backup time window To determine the required hardware it is essential to know how much time is available for the backup and the volume of data to be backed up within this time For example if the time is not sufficient for backup onto a tape device the solution must be planned as larger or alternatives such as the snapshot-based backup on memory level (Zero Downtime Backup) must be considered

The HP Storage Sizer provides support in determining the required hardware It plans the right libraries and appropriate StoreOnce system The Sizer tool is available to partners of HP

Tip For successful implementation of a backup and recovery environment an examination of the data in external offices is just as important as information regarding the data in the headquarters For example if the data of the external office are to be replicated as deduplicated in the headquarters the necessary requirements with regard to required capacities for StoreOnce systems and libraries must be met in the headquarters right at the start of the project

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

10

Requirements and recommendations for the HP Data Protector Cell Server

The hardware requirements for HP Data Protector are described in the Quickspecs (link at the end of the document) In addition to the main memory that the operating system requires HP Data Protector requires 256 MB main memory (512 MB recommended) for the Cell Manager For backup jobs running in parallel another 40 MB are required (assuming 10 backups running simultaneously this means 400 MB) 64 MB for the installation server 256 MB for the user interface and 64 MB (128 MB recommended) for the media agent In total and rounded up this totals a requirement of 15 GB main memory Initially there is no requirement in the Quickspecs regarding the number of processors However if the Cell Server is also to function simultaneously as media agent the following general formula applies 1 processor core per media agenttape device to be addressed

If the StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector is used the recommendation is to deploy another 4 to 6 processor cores and 6 GB main memory (exact formula can be found in the Quickspecs)

As a general minimum recommendation and as preparation for any future functions in the software the backup server should have at least 8 processor cores and at least 8 GB main memory Experience has shown that upgrading an existing server rarely makes good sense instead acquisition of the current HP ProLiant server model in each case is recommended

Tip During planning of the backup server attention should be paid to ensuring that the server is procured with more computing performance and main memory than required This allows within the framework of the lifecycle new functions in HP Data Protector that have higher hardware requirements can be integrated (for example integration of the StoreOnce software store)

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

On installation of the Cell Server you are asked which components are to be installed on the system As a rule the proposed selection is the right one for the Cell Server supplemented by the Disaster Recovery component This applies to HP Data Protector versions 7X and 8X

Note Before installation of the corresponding components the support matrices must be checked with regard to compatibility of the versions

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

11

Available components and their significance (depending on deployed version the selection can differ)

bullDisk Agent Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bull(General) Media Agent Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullNDMP Media Agent Supplements the general media agent to include functions for the backups of NDMP storage solutions

bullUser Interface Contains the user interface of HP Data Protector as well as the commands to be run on the command line

bullManager-of-Manager User Interface A special extension of the user interface required for management of a number of interconnected Cell Servers

bullJava User Interface ndash see User Interface Java-based This special user interface is no longer available for DP version 8X or higher

bullHP P9000 XP Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P9000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P6000 EVA SMI-S Agent Agent based on SMI-S standard for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P6000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P4000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P4000 (HP StoreVirtual) (= Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P10000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P10000 (HP 3PAR StoreServ) (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullMS Exchange Integration Enables backup of MS Exchange 2003 Stores

bullMS SQL Integration Enables backup of MS SQL servers via the lsquoVirtual Device Interfacersquo

bullMS SharePoint Integration Enables backup of MS SharePoint servers (ltversion 2007)

bullMS SharePoint Server 20072010 Integration Enables backup of the MS SharePoint farm

bullMS Exchange Server 2010 Integration2010 Enables backup of the databases of Microsoft Exchange 2010 and 2013 servers

bullSAP R3 Integration Agent for backup of SAP (Oracle) databases with BRtools (backint and rman)

bullSAP DB Integration Agent for backing up the MAXDBSAPDB database

bullSAP HANA Integration Agent for backing up SAP HANA in-memory database

bullOracle Integration Agent for backing up Oracle databases

bullSybase Integration Agent for backing up Sybase databases

bullInformix Integration Agent for backing up Informix databases

bullLotus Integration Enables backup of Lotus Notes databases (NSF)

bullDB2 Integration Agent for backing up DB2 databases

bullHP NNM Backup Integration Scripts for backup of an HP Network Node Manager implementation

bullMS Volume Shadow Copy Integration Enables backup of MS applications and file systems via the Microsoft VSS framework (for example MS Exchange 2007)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 4: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

4

As part of a solid backup and recovery program it is recommended that you integrate your company strategy with a disaster recovery plan that support the necessary backup and recovery requirements availabilities storage and hardware redundancies that meets your unique needs

When considering your backup and recovery strategy and as you perform a detailed analysis of your infrastructure consider the following points should therefore be examined intensively

bull What data should be backed up

bull How where and using what technology should the backup be created

bull How much data loss is tolerable (RPO) and what are your acceptable downtimes (RTO)

bull What are your data retention periods

Planning and preparation Ensuring the optimal implementation of a Data Protector environment requires detailed planning and preparation The planning starts with the selection of the operating system for the installation of HP Data Protector Cell Manager The Cell Manager is available for Linux HP-UX and Microsoft Windows The 64-bit variant of each operating system is preferred because it enables you to use the advanced options of HP Data Protector In the case of Microsoft MS Windows Server 2012 or 2012R2 is preferred The DP Cell Servers can also be installed in a cluster environment making it faster to entrust the protection of mission-critical data to a redundantly configured backup solution

Other aspects to consider in the planning phase bull Licenses

bull Data volume data growth scope of the infrastructure backup times (backup window)

bull Requirements and recommendations for the Cell Server

Installation and updateOnce the preparatory planning work for the backup and recovery environment has been completed you can install the Cell Server The process for installation is automated and can be completed in a few minutes

Sign in here to get supporthttpssoftwaresupporthpcomgroupsoftwaresupporthome

A few questions that may arise during and after the installation

bull Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

bull What is a patch bundle and in what order do you load the updates

bull How do you install the DP software on the server that requires a backup

ConfigurationOnce the installation of HP Data Protector is completed the solution is now ready in principle for deployment Drives can be set up pools can be defined media can be formatted backups can be set up and executed But there are a few areas that still require configuration as follows

HP Data Protector is installed with the so-called default settings which are valid for virtually any environment without any further adjustment Nonetheless in practice it is often advisable to change the Data Protector configuration files to your own environment as these can for example contain limitations with the corresponding individual customization or significantly influence the performance of the system

While descriptions of all the parameters are not included in this guide you can refer to detailed descriptions in the configuration files and help files andor the HP Data Protector manuals The following paragraphs will provide a few recommendations from practical application

The customisable files are lsquoglobarsquol and lsquoomnircrsquo (Linux Unix omnirc)

bullglobal The parameters in this file affect the entire environment managed by this Data Protector Cell Manager For example a change made to the timeout setting here will apply it to the entire environment managed under this Cell Manager Important to remember and in some cases necessary parameters are described in the second section of the guide

bullomnirc The options in this file only affect the individual client for which backup is configured In general it is recommended only to change the settings in this file if required by the environment The second section of the guide explains why customization is necessary for most environments and which parameters can be configured

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

5

Performance Performance tests should be considered part of the installation process for every Data Protector implementation They document the status of the environment to be backed up and reveal possible bottlenecks in the infrastructure The documentation of the conditions and results of the performance tests enables a comparison in the event of later repetition allowing conclusions to be drawn regarding the performance of the infrastructure Performance tests also enable optimal adjustment of the backup and recovery implementation to the circumstances of the environment because theory and practice do not always match up 100

The following points are relevant to the execution of the performance tests The combination of all the functions described allow you to enhance the overall performance of your backups

bullBlock size All drives (physical and virtual tape drives as well as backup-to-disk drives) are set up in HP Data Protector with a default block size For DP versions 7X the default value is 64 kB and for version 8X the default value is 256 kB As a rule increasing the size to 256 kB (DP versions lt 8X or for HP-UX) or 512 kB enhances the data throughput to the connected devices

bullSegment size When setting up new devices in HP Data Protector a default segment size is specified depending on the media type used As a rule increasing the segment size also increases the data throughput and also the speed of the data backup Depending on the media type that is used the size should be increased gradually

bullDiskagentbuffers Disk agent buffers have no direct influence on the overall performance of the backup but in the case of network backups they can lead to a constant data flow on the media agent The value 16 for this parameter has proven effective in practice

bullConcurrencymultiplexing On setting up the drives a default concurrency is specified depending on the media type that is used this value is often too low for the environment Raising it to 10 for example can considerably increase the backup speed and reduce the total duration of the backup As a rule a higher concurrency ensures better supply of the tape drive with data to be backed up

bullMulti-streaming Although the concurrency can be set when creating a backup specification only one disk agent per mount point is started during the backup In the case of very comprehensive mount points this can lead to a bottleneck during the data backup The individual configuration of multi-streaming can significantly enhance the performance of the backup for the individual mount points

bullNull device The null device describes a special drive type through which the maximum speed of a backup can be determined Furthermore the null device provides the possibility to test the settings for drives and identify possible bottlenecks in the environment

bullLAN vs SAN backups The SAN backup is preferred and allows you to make effective use of tape drive resources High bandwidths are required for backups via network (key word trunk or 10 GbE) to be able to take a tape device to the saturation limit

bullTools Various tools are available for performance analysis for example HPReadData HPCreateData and as a complete package HP LTT (Library and Tape Tools)

Backup-to-disk technologies Disk-based backup targets (backup-to-disk) offer fast and reliable ways to recover data HP Data Protector offers a continuum of backup target options that can be implemented as part of a recovery chain Those options are Data Protector Smart Cache traditional disk-based backup appliances (example StoreOnce and Data Domain appliances) tape and cloud

The following backup-to-disk technologies are available

bull Jukebox

bull File Library

bull B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

bull Data Protector Smart Cache

Documentation and reporting Once the backup and recovery environment is fully installed and the backups are running in daily operation you might think that the job is done But it isnrsquot An essential point for the implementation is still missing documentation of the environment

Good documentation of the environment is a requirement for successful recovery in the event of a disaster The documentation should contain at least the server names IP addresses mount points and directories to be backed up priorities and order for the recovery (example 1 MS Active Directory 2 DNS 3 MS Exchange) maximum recovery time maximum loss of data and the data volumes to be backed up

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

6

Optionally reporting can be used to record and document the data growth of the backups A schematic diagram of the environment helps other employees in the company to obtain quick insight into the environment An emergency handbook might include among other things the description of processes and responsibilities to help ensure efficient procedures in the event of a disaster

Other possibilities for documentation include

bull Creating reports in HP Data Protector

bull Creating notifications in HP Data Protector

bull Connectivity to monitoring solutions which helps to detect and document problems at an early stage

bull Documentation of the environment with external tools

bull The use of HP Backup Navigator an interactive web-based reporting and analytics application for the entire Data Protector environment

MaintenanceWith successful operation of the backup and recovery solution and with steady growth of the environment the Data Protector installation can be faced with new challenges However in many cases the data center environment changes unpredictably as additional workloads are added or data grows faster than originally expected which can result in insufficient backup windows to complete the backup task In these cases regular maintenance dates should be scheduled Depending on the size of the environment maintenance dates should set quarterly to twice a year The objective of the maintenance is to proactively assess the state of the backup environment and fine-tune Data Protector parameters for optimal backup and recovery performance

The following activities should be included in a maintenance date

bullPurge A purge of the internal database helps to remove entries that are no longer required and ultimately ensures consistent good performance of the backup environment This task is performed automatically with HP Data Protector version 8X For HP Data Protector versions 6 and 7 the purge is a necessary task to clean up and defragment the internal database

bullClean-up The reality with any implementation is that the environment changes new clients are installed and servers are decommissioned Often clients that no longer exist are not removed from the Data Protector configuration This is particularly noticeable for example when you want to create new SQL backups in the user interface of Data Protector and results in the user interface running slowly As a rule the cause of this is a check of the name resolution for the backup clients being carried out in the background This causes a timeout for systems that no longer exist and leads to significantly slower characteristics of the user interface Regular detection and maintenance of the backup client is therefore advisable

bullPatches A maintenance date or times in which a no backup is carried out are good opportunities for the installation of new updates This allows problems to be remedied and new functions to be enabled A requirement for installation of the updates is a valid maintenance agreement Furthermore support packs for the server and updates of the firmware for the server and tape library can also be installed in this period Also the HP Library and Tape Tools are available to use to update the firmware of HP libraries

bullRecovery tests and disaster recovery Within the framework of maintenance the recovery of files and servers should be verified at regular intervals to provide greater security and assurance in the event of serious incidents

bullDocumentation Within the framework of maintenance it is a good idea to verify and adapt the existing documentation of the backup environment Moreover if present the emergency handbook can be revised and supplemented in the course of performing these other tasks The BRICK tool can also be used to record the ACTUAL state of the Data Protector environment on the maintenance date and store it as documentation

What data should be backed up

The answer to this question depends on the requirements for the environment In principle everything should be backed up including the system state Only individual files or directories should be taken out of the backup by means of exclusion rules In general it applies that a backup must contain at least the data that are necessary for recovery of the application on the system In the case of an MS SQL server this involves at least a backup of the databases and the transactions and the settings of the SQL server The operating system could for example also be restored by rolling out a prepared operating system template with the deployment of virtual machines

Making decisions about backing up data by an individual server is typically inadequate In a company there can be business processes that are mapped on a number of servers For example if the company operates a web service to be able to offer customers spare parts ordering the web service does not consist only of the web server As a rule the

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

7

operation of the web service also requires connectivity to the internet DNS credit checks possibly an Active Directory possibly a file server and a CRM solution In case of a disaster the entire service must therefore be examined and its data backed up andor safeguarded against failures

Tip In many cases only the central location of the company is examined A backup and recovery strategy for external offices should also be a constituent part of the definition With HP Data Protector and the integrated deduplication technologies or the HP StoreOnce system external offices can be easily included in the overall data protection strategy

How where and what technology should be used to create the backup

HP Data Protector provides a broad spectrum of options to safeguard mission-critical data against disaster A few examples of the possibilities are provided below

bullIntegrations The backup of applications and databases takes place by means of a special agent which ensures that applications are placed in a calm state (backup state) to enable application-consistent data backup In the event of a disaster the application can then be restored including transactions In the case of virtualized environments the complete virtual machine and with the Microsoft VSS framework also the application (for example MS Exchange) can be backed up in the virtual machine by means of the integration

bullDisk staging This is a technology where the data are first of all cached on a hard disk area before they are copied onto a physical tape in a downstream process With simultaneous integration of deduplication a greater number of backups can be kept Disk staging is suitable primarily for backups with a short retention period as with intermediate storage and for rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullIncremental forever Incremental forever refers to a special process in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup Here the backup takes place partially or completely on a hard disk area with regular consolidations of the data stocks ensuring rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullDeduplication Deduplication refers to a method of detecting and removing redundancies on block level during the backup when the blocks to be backed up are compared with blocks that have already been backed up This method is holistically integrated into the HP portfolio (HP StoreOnce systems and HP Data Protector) and permits for example complete integration of the external offices into the central backup and recovery strategy of a company

Tip The combination of the different technologies in HP Data Protector provides comprehensive flexibility and optimal support for the company in the possible event of a disaster

Loss of datadowntimes

The extent of loss of data and acceptable recovery times should be determined individually for each system or each service of the company The type and frequency of backups in HP Data Protector can be derived from the data obtained

Tip Please note that patching and upgrading Data Protector doesnrsquot create any downtime

Explanations of some key terms are provided below

bull Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the maximum loss of data in the event of a failure As a rule it is the time interval between two backups This value specifies the maximum volume of transactions or data that can be lost between the last backup and a possible case of disaster

bull Recovery Time Objective (RTO) refers to the agreed recovery time and as a rule is the period between occurrence of a disaster and recovery of the business processes Possible additional activities can be

ndash Hardware provision and recovery of the infrastructure

ndash Connection and configuration of the hardware on the network

ndash Recovery of the operating system

ndash Installation of the backup client software

ndash Identification of the data and information to be reloaded

ndash Identification of the required backup medium and its provision

ndash Data recovery from tape

ndash Recovery of databases

ndash Test and share of the reloaded data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Disaster

LogicalPhysicalHardware (server)SAN switchFirewallNetworkStorageData center (powercooling)

Data deletionData corruptionHuman errorFW updatespatchesSabotage

8

bull The illustration shows an example of how a failure (case of disaster) can occur and what causes it

Tip A list of all servers and services of the company with evaluation of the priorities data volumes backup frequencies and recovery times should be a constituent part of every disaster recovery plan

Retention periods

The retention period refers to the period in which data must be available for recovery With HP Data Protector there are various possibilities for configuring the protection period of a backup ranging from no protection period at all to days weeks months and yearsmdashall the way to permanent protection of the data HP Data Protector is therefore also ideal for long-term data archival though it should not be confused with an archiving solution

For example the legal regulations in Germany based on the type of data (for example documents with significance for tax invoices and annual accounts) and industry sector (for example medical data) range from 6 10 or 20 years up to permanent retention Every company is under obligation to implement and comply with the regulations applicable to that company

Tip To protect against inadvertent overwriting of the tapes (human error) or destruction of the data due to sabotage it is recommended to copy the data onto physical tapes for long-term storage and store these at a suitable location outside of the company

Licenses

Certain functions of HP Data Protector to be used in the planning phase are specified On the basis of these considerations it is easy to determine the required number of functionalities and licenses The HP Storage Sizer tool is available to provide assistance The Storage Sizer tool contains the HP Data Protector software Sizer which can be called up separately

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Data Types Backup To Disk (daily)

Backup to Tape (weekly)

Infrastructure 500 GB 2500 GB

Management 1000 GB 5000 GB

BampR environment 500 GB 2500 GB

File Server 3000 GB 15000 GB

Mail Databases 5000 GB 25000 GB

Databases 2000 GB 10000 GB

Total 12000 GB 60000 GB

Growth Yearly 20 Backup to Tape (monthly) in TB

2014 240

2015 288

2016 346

2017 416

2018 500

9

This application can be used to plan your backup and recovery project The Data Protector environment can be licensed according to the traditional model (one license for each functionality) or the capacity-based model The tool is available to partners of HP

Tip If you do not know at the start of a project which functions of HP Data Protector are to be used all the functions of HP Data Protector can be tested free of charge for a period of 60 days within the framework of an evaluation The software can be downloaded at httpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

Data volume data growth sizing and backup times

To determine which hardware (servers SAN network tape libraries HP StoreOnce systems etc) are required for the backup and recovery environment it is important to know the size of the environment The existing data volume the data growth per year and the backup window all influence selection of the hardware to be deployed

The following table helps determine the data volumes to be backed up

If you know the rate of data growth the total backup volume can be calculated on the basis of the calculated data volume The table below clarifies that when the project is viewed over a period of five years you will want to double the data volume needs to be backed up at the end of the period To determine the right values for the future any examination or analysis should take account of this during planning of the backup and recovery environment

Note The tables are examples and must be viewed individually depending on the unique requirements of the organization

Backups are rarely carried out in the backup environment for 24 hours without interruption because during the day there is often the need to give priority to production applications Backups therefore usually take place outside of business hours in a so-called backup time window To determine the required hardware it is essential to know how much time is available for the backup and the volume of data to be backed up within this time For example if the time is not sufficient for backup onto a tape device the solution must be planned as larger or alternatives such as the snapshot-based backup on memory level (Zero Downtime Backup) must be considered

The HP Storage Sizer provides support in determining the required hardware It plans the right libraries and appropriate StoreOnce system The Sizer tool is available to partners of HP

Tip For successful implementation of a backup and recovery environment an examination of the data in external offices is just as important as information regarding the data in the headquarters For example if the data of the external office are to be replicated as deduplicated in the headquarters the necessary requirements with regard to required capacities for StoreOnce systems and libraries must be met in the headquarters right at the start of the project

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

10

Requirements and recommendations for the HP Data Protector Cell Server

The hardware requirements for HP Data Protector are described in the Quickspecs (link at the end of the document) In addition to the main memory that the operating system requires HP Data Protector requires 256 MB main memory (512 MB recommended) for the Cell Manager For backup jobs running in parallel another 40 MB are required (assuming 10 backups running simultaneously this means 400 MB) 64 MB for the installation server 256 MB for the user interface and 64 MB (128 MB recommended) for the media agent In total and rounded up this totals a requirement of 15 GB main memory Initially there is no requirement in the Quickspecs regarding the number of processors However if the Cell Server is also to function simultaneously as media agent the following general formula applies 1 processor core per media agenttape device to be addressed

If the StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector is used the recommendation is to deploy another 4 to 6 processor cores and 6 GB main memory (exact formula can be found in the Quickspecs)

As a general minimum recommendation and as preparation for any future functions in the software the backup server should have at least 8 processor cores and at least 8 GB main memory Experience has shown that upgrading an existing server rarely makes good sense instead acquisition of the current HP ProLiant server model in each case is recommended

Tip During planning of the backup server attention should be paid to ensuring that the server is procured with more computing performance and main memory than required This allows within the framework of the lifecycle new functions in HP Data Protector that have higher hardware requirements can be integrated (for example integration of the StoreOnce software store)

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

On installation of the Cell Server you are asked which components are to be installed on the system As a rule the proposed selection is the right one for the Cell Server supplemented by the Disaster Recovery component This applies to HP Data Protector versions 7X and 8X

Note Before installation of the corresponding components the support matrices must be checked with regard to compatibility of the versions

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

11

Available components and their significance (depending on deployed version the selection can differ)

bullDisk Agent Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bull(General) Media Agent Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullNDMP Media Agent Supplements the general media agent to include functions for the backups of NDMP storage solutions

bullUser Interface Contains the user interface of HP Data Protector as well as the commands to be run on the command line

bullManager-of-Manager User Interface A special extension of the user interface required for management of a number of interconnected Cell Servers

bullJava User Interface ndash see User Interface Java-based This special user interface is no longer available for DP version 8X or higher

bullHP P9000 XP Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P9000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P6000 EVA SMI-S Agent Agent based on SMI-S standard for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P6000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P4000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P4000 (HP StoreVirtual) (= Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P10000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P10000 (HP 3PAR StoreServ) (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullMS Exchange Integration Enables backup of MS Exchange 2003 Stores

bullMS SQL Integration Enables backup of MS SQL servers via the lsquoVirtual Device Interfacersquo

bullMS SharePoint Integration Enables backup of MS SharePoint servers (ltversion 2007)

bullMS SharePoint Server 20072010 Integration Enables backup of the MS SharePoint farm

bullMS Exchange Server 2010 Integration2010 Enables backup of the databases of Microsoft Exchange 2010 and 2013 servers

bullSAP R3 Integration Agent for backup of SAP (Oracle) databases with BRtools (backint and rman)

bullSAP DB Integration Agent for backing up the MAXDBSAPDB database

bullSAP HANA Integration Agent for backing up SAP HANA in-memory database

bullOracle Integration Agent for backing up Oracle databases

bullSybase Integration Agent for backing up Sybase databases

bullInformix Integration Agent for backing up Informix databases

bullLotus Integration Enables backup of Lotus Notes databases (NSF)

bullDB2 Integration Agent for backing up DB2 databases

bullHP NNM Backup Integration Scripts for backup of an HP Network Node Manager implementation

bullMS Volume Shadow Copy Integration Enables backup of MS applications and file systems via the Microsoft VSS framework (for example MS Exchange 2007)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 5: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

5

Performance Performance tests should be considered part of the installation process for every Data Protector implementation They document the status of the environment to be backed up and reveal possible bottlenecks in the infrastructure The documentation of the conditions and results of the performance tests enables a comparison in the event of later repetition allowing conclusions to be drawn regarding the performance of the infrastructure Performance tests also enable optimal adjustment of the backup and recovery implementation to the circumstances of the environment because theory and practice do not always match up 100

The following points are relevant to the execution of the performance tests The combination of all the functions described allow you to enhance the overall performance of your backups

bullBlock size All drives (physical and virtual tape drives as well as backup-to-disk drives) are set up in HP Data Protector with a default block size For DP versions 7X the default value is 64 kB and for version 8X the default value is 256 kB As a rule increasing the size to 256 kB (DP versions lt 8X or for HP-UX) or 512 kB enhances the data throughput to the connected devices

bullSegment size When setting up new devices in HP Data Protector a default segment size is specified depending on the media type used As a rule increasing the segment size also increases the data throughput and also the speed of the data backup Depending on the media type that is used the size should be increased gradually

bullDiskagentbuffers Disk agent buffers have no direct influence on the overall performance of the backup but in the case of network backups they can lead to a constant data flow on the media agent The value 16 for this parameter has proven effective in practice

bullConcurrencymultiplexing On setting up the drives a default concurrency is specified depending on the media type that is used this value is often too low for the environment Raising it to 10 for example can considerably increase the backup speed and reduce the total duration of the backup As a rule a higher concurrency ensures better supply of the tape drive with data to be backed up

bullMulti-streaming Although the concurrency can be set when creating a backup specification only one disk agent per mount point is started during the backup In the case of very comprehensive mount points this can lead to a bottleneck during the data backup The individual configuration of multi-streaming can significantly enhance the performance of the backup for the individual mount points

bullNull device The null device describes a special drive type through which the maximum speed of a backup can be determined Furthermore the null device provides the possibility to test the settings for drives and identify possible bottlenecks in the environment

bullLAN vs SAN backups The SAN backup is preferred and allows you to make effective use of tape drive resources High bandwidths are required for backups via network (key word trunk or 10 GbE) to be able to take a tape device to the saturation limit

bullTools Various tools are available for performance analysis for example HPReadData HPCreateData and as a complete package HP LTT (Library and Tape Tools)

Backup-to-disk technologies Disk-based backup targets (backup-to-disk) offer fast and reliable ways to recover data HP Data Protector offers a continuum of backup target options that can be implemented as part of a recovery chain Those options are Data Protector Smart Cache traditional disk-based backup appliances (example StoreOnce and Data Domain appliances) tape and cloud

The following backup-to-disk technologies are available

bull Jukebox

bull File Library

bull B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

bull Data Protector Smart Cache

Documentation and reporting Once the backup and recovery environment is fully installed and the backups are running in daily operation you might think that the job is done But it isnrsquot An essential point for the implementation is still missing documentation of the environment

Good documentation of the environment is a requirement for successful recovery in the event of a disaster The documentation should contain at least the server names IP addresses mount points and directories to be backed up priorities and order for the recovery (example 1 MS Active Directory 2 DNS 3 MS Exchange) maximum recovery time maximum loss of data and the data volumes to be backed up

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

6

Optionally reporting can be used to record and document the data growth of the backups A schematic diagram of the environment helps other employees in the company to obtain quick insight into the environment An emergency handbook might include among other things the description of processes and responsibilities to help ensure efficient procedures in the event of a disaster

Other possibilities for documentation include

bull Creating reports in HP Data Protector

bull Creating notifications in HP Data Protector

bull Connectivity to monitoring solutions which helps to detect and document problems at an early stage

bull Documentation of the environment with external tools

bull The use of HP Backup Navigator an interactive web-based reporting and analytics application for the entire Data Protector environment

MaintenanceWith successful operation of the backup and recovery solution and with steady growth of the environment the Data Protector installation can be faced with new challenges However in many cases the data center environment changes unpredictably as additional workloads are added or data grows faster than originally expected which can result in insufficient backup windows to complete the backup task In these cases regular maintenance dates should be scheduled Depending on the size of the environment maintenance dates should set quarterly to twice a year The objective of the maintenance is to proactively assess the state of the backup environment and fine-tune Data Protector parameters for optimal backup and recovery performance

The following activities should be included in a maintenance date

bullPurge A purge of the internal database helps to remove entries that are no longer required and ultimately ensures consistent good performance of the backup environment This task is performed automatically with HP Data Protector version 8X For HP Data Protector versions 6 and 7 the purge is a necessary task to clean up and defragment the internal database

bullClean-up The reality with any implementation is that the environment changes new clients are installed and servers are decommissioned Often clients that no longer exist are not removed from the Data Protector configuration This is particularly noticeable for example when you want to create new SQL backups in the user interface of Data Protector and results in the user interface running slowly As a rule the cause of this is a check of the name resolution for the backup clients being carried out in the background This causes a timeout for systems that no longer exist and leads to significantly slower characteristics of the user interface Regular detection and maintenance of the backup client is therefore advisable

bullPatches A maintenance date or times in which a no backup is carried out are good opportunities for the installation of new updates This allows problems to be remedied and new functions to be enabled A requirement for installation of the updates is a valid maintenance agreement Furthermore support packs for the server and updates of the firmware for the server and tape library can also be installed in this period Also the HP Library and Tape Tools are available to use to update the firmware of HP libraries

bullRecovery tests and disaster recovery Within the framework of maintenance the recovery of files and servers should be verified at regular intervals to provide greater security and assurance in the event of serious incidents

bullDocumentation Within the framework of maintenance it is a good idea to verify and adapt the existing documentation of the backup environment Moreover if present the emergency handbook can be revised and supplemented in the course of performing these other tasks The BRICK tool can also be used to record the ACTUAL state of the Data Protector environment on the maintenance date and store it as documentation

What data should be backed up

The answer to this question depends on the requirements for the environment In principle everything should be backed up including the system state Only individual files or directories should be taken out of the backup by means of exclusion rules In general it applies that a backup must contain at least the data that are necessary for recovery of the application on the system In the case of an MS SQL server this involves at least a backup of the databases and the transactions and the settings of the SQL server The operating system could for example also be restored by rolling out a prepared operating system template with the deployment of virtual machines

Making decisions about backing up data by an individual server is typically inadequate In a company there can be business processes that are mapped on a number of servers For example if the company operates a web service to be able to offer customers spare parts ordering the web service does not consist only of the web server As a rule the

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

7

operation of the web service also requires connectivity to the internet DNS credit checks possibly an Active Directory possibly a file server and a CRM solution In case of a disaster the entire service must therefore be examined and its data backed up andor safeguarded against failures

Tip In many cases only the central location of the company is examined A backup and recovery strategy for external offices should also be a constituent part of the definition With HP Data Protector and the integrated deduplication technologies or the HP StoreOnce system external offices can be easily included in the overall data protection strategy

How where and what technology should be used to create the backup

HP Data Protector provides a broad spectrum of options to safeguard mission-critical data against disaster A few examples of the possibilities are provided below

bullIntegrations The backup of applications and databases takes place by means of a special agent which ensures that applications are placed in a calm state (backup state) to enable application-consistent data backup In the event of a disaster the application can then be restored including transactions In the case of virtualized environments the complete virtual machine and with the Microsoft VSS framework also the application (for example MS Exchange) can be backed up in the virtual machine by means of the integration

bullDisk staging This is a technology where the data are first of all cached on a hard disk area before they are copied onto a physical tape in a downstream process With simultaneous integration of deduplication a greater number of backups can be kept Disk staging is suitable primarily for backups with a short retention period as with intermediate storage and for rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullIncremental forever Incremental forever refers to a special process in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup Here the backup takes place partially or completely on a hard disk area with regular consolidations of the data stocks ensuring rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullDeduplication Deduplication refers to a method of detecting and removing redundancies on block level during the backup when the blocks to be backed up are compared with blocks that have already been backed up This method is holistically integrated into the HP portfolio (HP StoreOnce systems and HP Data Protector) and permits for example complete integration of the external offices into the central backup and recovery strategy of a company

Tip The combination of the different technologies in HP Data Protector provides comprehensive flexibility and optimal support for the company in the possible event of a disaster

Loss of datadowntimes

The extent of loss of data and acceptable recovery times should be determined individually for each system or each service of the company The type and frequency of backups in HP Data Protector can be derived from the data obtained

Tip Please note that patching and upgrading Data Protector doesnrsquot create any downtime

Explanations of some key terms are provided below

bull Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the maximum loss of data in the event of a failure As a rule it is the time interval between two backups This value specifies the maximum volume of transactions or data that can be lost between the last backup and a possible case of disaster

bull Recovery Time Objective (RTO) refers to the agreed recovery time and as a rule is the period between occurrence of a disaster and recovery of the business processes Possible additional activities can be

ndash Hardware provision and recovery of the infrastructure

ndash Connection and configuration of the hardware on the network

ndash Recovery of the operating system

ndash Installation of the backup client software

ndash Identification of the data and information to be reloaded

ndash Identification of the required backup medium and its provision

ndash Data recovery from tape

ndash Recovery of databases

ndash Test and share of the reloaded data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Disaster

LogicalPhysicalHardware (server)SAN switchFirewallNetworkStorageData center (powercooling)

Data deletionData corruptionHuman errorFW updatespatchesSabotage

8

bull The illustration shows an example of how a failure (case of disaster) can occur and what causes it

Tip A list of all servers and services of the company with evaluation of the priorities data volumes backup frequencies and recovery times should be a constituent part of every disaster recovery plan

Retention periods

The retention period refers to the period in which data must be available for recovery With HP Data Protector there are various possibilities for configuring the protection period of a backup ranging from no protection period at all to days weeks months and yearsmdashall the way to permanent protection of the data HP Data Protector is therefore also ideal for long-term data archival though it should not be confused with an archiving solution

For example the legal regulations in Germany based on the type of data (for example documents with significance for tax invoices and annual accounts) and industry sector (for example medical data) range from 6 10 or 20 years up to permanent retention Every company is under obligation to implement and comply with the regulations applicable to that company

Tip To protect against inadvertent overwriting of the tapes (human error) or destruction of the data due to sabotage it is recommended to copy the data onto physical tapes for long-term storage and store these at a suitable location outside of the company

Licenses

Certain functions of HP Data Protector to be used in the planning phase are specified On the basis of these considerations it is easy to determine the required number of functionalities and licenses The HP Storage Sizer tool is available to provide assistance The Storage Sizer tool contains the HP Data Protector software Sizer which can be called up separately

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Data Types Backup To Disk (daily)

Backup to Tape (weekly)

Infrastructure 500 GB 2500 GB

Management 1000 GB 5000 GB

BampR environment 500 GB 2500 GB

File Server 3000 GB 15000 GB

Mail Databases 5000 GB 25000 GB

Databases 2000 GB 10000 GB

Total 12000 GB 60000 GB

Growth Yearly 20 Backup to Tape (monthly) in TB

2014 240

2015 288

2016 346

2017 416

2018 500

9

This application can be used to plan your backup and recovery project The Data Protector environment can be licensed according to the traditional model (one license for each functionality) or the capacity-based model The tool is available to partners of HP

Tip If you do not know at the start of a project which functions of HP Data Protector are to be used all the functions of HP Data Protector can be tested free of charge for a period of 60 days within the framework of an evaluation The software can be downloaded at httpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

Data volume data growth sizing and backup times

To determine which hardware (servers SAN network tape libraries HP StoreOnce systems etc) are required for the backup and recovery environment it is important to know the size of the environment The existing data volume the data growth per year and the backup window all influence selection of the hardware to be deployed

The following table helps determine the data volumes to be backed up

If you know the rate of data growth the total backup volume can be calculated on the basis of the calculated data volume The table below clarifies that when the project is viewed over a period of five years you will want to double the data volume needs to be backed up at the end of the period To determine the right values for the future any examination or analysis should take account of this during planning of the backup and recovery environment

Note The tables are examples and must be viewed individually depending on the unique requirements of the organization

Backups are rarely carried out in the backup environment for 24 hours without interruption because during the day there is often the need to give priority to production applications Backups therefore usually take place outside of business hours in a so-called backup time window To determine the required hardware it is essential to know how much time is available for the backup and the volume of data to be backed up within this time For example if the time is not sufficient for backup onto a tape device the solution must be planned as larger or alternatives such as the snapshot-based backup on memory level (Zero Downtime Backup) must be considered

The HP Storage Sizer provides support in determining the required hardware It plans the right libraries and appropriate StoreOnce system The Sizer tool is available to partners of HP

Tip For successful implementation of a backup and recovery environment an examination of the data in external offices is just as important as information regarding the data in the headquarters For example if the data of the external office are to be replicated as deduplicated in the headquarters the necessary requirements with regard to required capacities for StoreOnce systems and libraries must be met in the headquarters right at the start of the project

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

10

Requirements and recommendations for the HP Data Protector Cell Server

The hardware requirements for HP Data Protector are described in the Quickspecs (link at the end of the document) In addition to the main memory that the operating system requires HP Data Protector requires 256 MB main memory (512 MB recommended) for the Cell Manager For backup jobs running in parallel another 40 MB are required (assuming 10 backups running simultaneously this means 400 MB) 64 MB for the installation server 256 MB for the user interface and 64 MB (128 MB recommended) for the media agent In total and rounded up this totals a requirement of 15 GB main memory Initially there is no requirement in the Quickspecs regarding the number of processors However if the Cell Server is also to function simultaneously as media agent the following general formula applies 1 processor core per media agenttape device to be addressed

If the StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector is used the recommendation is to deploy another 4 to 6 processor cores and 6 GB main memory (exact formula can be found in the Quickspecs)

As a general minimum recommendation and as preparation for any future functions in the software the backup server should have at least 8 processor cores and at least 8 GB main memory Experience has shown that upgrading an existing server rarely makes good sense instead acquisition of the current HP ProLiant server model in each case is recommended

Tip During planning of the backup server attention should be paid to ensuring that the server is procured with more computing performance and main memory than required This allows within the framework of the lifecycle new functions in HP Data Protector that have higher hardware requirements can be integrated (for example integration of the StoreOnce software store)

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

On installation of the Cell Server you are asked which components are to be installed on the system As a rule the proposed selection is the right one for the Cell Server supplemented by the Disaster Recovery component This applies to HP Data Protector versions 7X and 8X

Note Before installation of the corresponding components the support matrices must be checked with regard to compatibility of the versions

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

11

Available components and their significance (depending on deployed version the selection can differ)

bullDisk Agent Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bull(General) Media Agent Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullNDMP Media Agent Supplements the general media agent to include functions for the backups of NDMP storage solutions

bullUser Interface Contains the user interface of HP Data Protector as well as the commands to be run on the command line

bullManager-of-Manager User Interface A special extension of the user interface required for management of a number of interconnected Cell Servers

bullJava User Interface ndash see User Interface Java-based This special user interface is no longer available for DP version 8X or higher

bullHP P9000 XP Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P9000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P6000 EVA SMI-S Agent Agent based on SMI-S standard for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P6000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P4000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P4000 (HP StoreVirtual) (= Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P10000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P10000 (HP 3PAR StoreServ) (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullMS Exchange Integration Enables backup of MS Exchange 2003 Stores

bullMS SQL Integration Enables backup of MS SQL servers via the lsquoVirtual Device Interfacersquo

bullMS SharePoint Integration Enables backup of MS SharePoint servers (ltversion 2007)

bullMS SharePoint Server 20072010 Integration Enables backup of the MS SharePoint farm

bullMS Exchange Server 2010 Integration2010 Enables backup of the databases of Microsoft Exchange 2010 and 2013 servers

bullSAP R3 Integration Agent for backup of SAP (Oracle) databases with BRtools (backint and rman)

bullSAP DB Integration Agent for backing up the MAXDBSAPDB database

bullSAP HANA Integration Agent for backing up SAP HANA in-memory database

bullOracle Integration Agent for backing up Oracle databases

bullSybase Integration Agent for backing up Sybase databases

bullInformix Integration Agent for backing up Informix databases

bullLotus Integration Enables backup of Lotus Notes databases (NSF)

bullDB2 Integration Agent for backing up DB2 databases

bullHP NNM Backup Integration Scripts for backup of an HP Network Node Manager implementation

bullMS Volume Shadow Copy Integration Enables backup of MS applications and file systems via the Microsoft VSS framework (for example MS Exchange 2007)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 6: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

6

Optionally reporting can be used to record and document the data growth of the backups A schematic diagram of the environment helps other employees in the company to obtain quick insight into the environment An emergency handbook might include among other things the description of processes and responsibilities to help ensure efficient procedures in the event of a disaster

Other possibilities for documentation include

bull Creating reports in HP Data Protector

bull Creating notifications in HP Data Protector

bull Connectivity to monitoring solutions which helps to detect and document problems at an early stage

bull Documentation of the environment with external tools

bull The use of HP Backup Navigator an interactive web-based reporting and analytics application for the entire Data Protector environment

MaintenanceWith successful operation of the backup and recovery solution and with steady growth of the environment the Data Protector installation can be faced with new challenges However in many cases the data center environment changes unpredictably as additional workloads are added or data grows faster than originally expected which can result in insufficient backup windows to complete the backup task In these cases regular maintenance dates should be scheduled Depending on the size of the environment maintenance dates should set quarterly to twice a year The objective of the maintenance is to proactively assess the state of the backup environment and fine-tune Data Protector parameters for optimal backup and recovery performance

The following activities should be included in a maintenance date

bullPurge A purge of the internal database helps to remove entries that are no longer required and ultimately ensures consistent good performance of the backup environment This task is performed automatically with HP Data Protector version 8X For HP Data Protector versions 6 and 7 the purge is a necessary task to clean up and defragment the internal database

bullClean-up The reality with any implementation is that the environment changes new clients are installed and servers are decommissioned Often clients that no longer exist are not removed from the Data Protector configuration This is particularly noticeable for example when you want to create new SQL backups in the user interface of Data Protector and results in the user interface running slowly As a rule the cause of this is a check of the name resolution for the backup clients being carried out in the background This causes a timeout for systems that no longer exist and leads to significantly slower characteristics of the user interface Regular detection and maintenance of the backup client is therefore advisable

bullPatches A maintenance date or times in which a no backup is carried out are good opportunities for the installation of new updates This allows problems to be remedied and new functions to be enabled A requirement for installation of the updates is a valid maintenance agreement Furthermore support packs for the server and updates of the firmware for the server and tape library can also be installed in this period Also the HP Library and Tape Tools are available to use to update the firmware of HP libraries

bullRecovery tests and disaster recovery Within the framework of maintenance the recovery of files and servers should be verified at regular intervals to provide greater security and assurance in the event of serious incidents

bullDocumentation Within the framework of maintenance it is a good idea to verify and adapt the existing documentation of the backup environment Moreover if present the emergency handbook can be revised and supplemented in the course of performing these other tasks The BRICK tool can also be used to record the ACTUAL state of the Data Protector environment on the maintenance date and store it as documentation

What data should be backed up

The answer to this question depends on the requirements for the environment In principle everything should be backed up including the system state Only individual files or directories should be taken out of the backup by means of exclusion rules In general it applies that a backup must contain at least the data that are necessary for recovery of the application on the system In the case of an MS SQL server this involves at least a backup of the databases and the transactions and the settings of the SQL server The operating system could for example also be restored by rolling out a prepared operating system template with the deployment of virtual machines

Making decisions about backing up data by an individual server is typically inadequate In a company there can be business processes that are mapped on a number of servers For example if the company operates a web service to be able to offer customers spare parts ordering the web service does not consist only of the web server As a rule the

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

7

operation of the web service also requires connectivity to the internet DNS credit checks possibly an Active Directory possibly a file server and a CRM solution In case of a disaster the entire service must therefore be examined and its data backed up andor safeguarded against failures

Tip In many cases only the central location of the company is examined A backup and recovery strategy for external offices should also be a constituent part of the definition With HP Data Protector and the integrated deduplication technologies or the HP StoreOnce system external offices can be easily included in the overall data protection strategy

How where and what technology should be used to create the backup

HP Data Protector provides a broad spectrum of options to safeguard mission-critical data against disaster A few examples of the possibilities are provided below

bullIntegrations The backup of applications and databases takes place by means of a special agent which ensures that applications are placed in a calm state (backup state) to enable application-consistent data backup In the event of a disaster the application can then be restored including transactions In the case of virtualized environments the complete virtual machine and with the Microsoft VSS framework also the application (for example MS Exchange) can be backed up in the virtual machine by means of the integration

bullDisk staging This is a technology where the data are first of all cached on a hard disk area before they are copied onto a physical tape in a downstream process With simultaneous integration of deduplication a greater number of backups can be kept Disk staging is suitable primarily for backups with a short retention period as with intermediate storage and for rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullIncremental forever Incremental forever refers to a special process in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup Here the backup takes place partially or completely on a hard disk area with regular consolidations of the data stocks ensuring rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullDeduplication Deduplication refers to a method of detecting and removing redundancies on block level during the backup when the blocks to be backed up are compared with blocks that have already been backed up This method is holistically integrated into the HP portfolio (HP StoreOnce systems and HP Data Protector) and permits for example complete integration of the external offices into the central backup and recovery strategy of a company

Tip The combination of the different technologies in HP Data Protector provides comprehensive flexibility and optimal support for the company in the possible event of a disaster

Loss of datadowntimes

The extent of loss of data and acceptable recovery times should be determined individually for each system or each service of the company The type and frequency of backups in HP Data Protector can be derived from the data obtained

Tip Please note that patching and upgrading Data Protector doesnrsquot create any downtime

Explanations of some key terms are provided below

bull Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the maximum loss of data in the event of a failure As a rule it is the time interval between two backups This value specifies the maximum volume of transactions or data that can be lost between the last backup and a possible case of disaster

bull Recovery Time Objective (RTO) refers to the agreed recovery time and as a rule is the period between occurrence of a disaster and recovery of the business processes Possible additional activities can be

ndash Hardware provision and recovery of the infrastructure

ndash Connection and configuration of the hardware on the network

ndash Recovery of the operating system

ndash Installation of the backup client software

ndash Identification of the data and information to be reloaded

ndash Identification of the required backup medium and its provision

ndash Data recovery from tape

ndash Recovery of databases

ndash Test and share of the reloaded data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Disaster

LogicalPhysicalHardware (server)SAN switchFirewallNetworkStorageData center (powercooling)

Data deletionData corruptionHuman errorFW updatespatchesSabotage

8

bull The illustration shows an example of how a failure (case of disaster) can occur and what causes it

Tip A list of all servers and services of the company with evaluation of the priorities data volumes backup frequencies and recovery times should be a constituent part of every disaster recovery plan

Retention periods

The retention period refers to the period in which data must be available for recovery With HP Data Protector there are various possibilities for configuring the protection period of a backup ranging from no protection period at all to days weeks months and yearsmdashall the way to permanent protection of the data HP Data Protector is therefore also ideal for long-term data archival though it should not be confused with an archiving solution

For example the legal regulations in Germany based on the type of data (for example documents with significance for tax invoices and annual accounts) and industry sector (for example medical data) range from 6 10 or 20 years up to permanent retention Every company is under obligation to implement and comply with the regulations applicable to that company

Tip To protect against inadvertent overwriting of the tapes (human error) or destruction of the data due to sabotage it is recommended to copy the data onto physical tapes for long-term storage and store these at a suitable location outside of the company

Licenses

Certain functions of HP Data Protector to be used in the planning phase are specified On the basis of these considerations it is easy to determine the required number of functionalities and licenses The HP Storage Sizer tool is available to provide assistance The Storage Sizer tool contains the HP Data Protector software Sizer which can be called up separately

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Data Types Backup To Disk (daily)

Backup to Tape (weekly)

Infrastructure 500 GB 2500 GB

Management 1000 GB 5000 GB

BampR environment 500 GB 2500 GB

File Server 3000 GB 15000 GB

Mail Databases 5000 GB 25000 GB

Databases 2000 GB 10000 GB

Total 12000 GB 60000 GB

Growth Yearly 20 Backup to Tape (monthly) in TB

2014 240

2015 288

2016 346

2017 416

2018 500

9

This application can be used to plan your backup and recovery project The Data Protector environment can be licensed according to the traditional model (one license for each functionality) or the capacity-based model The tool is available to partners of HP

Tip If you do not know at the start of a project which functions of HP Data Protector are to be used all the functions of HP Data Protector can be tested free of charge for a period of 60 days within the framework of an evaluation The software can be downloaded at httpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

Data volume data growth sizing and backup times

To determine which hardware (servers SAN network tape libraries HP StoreOnce systems etc) are required for the backup and recovery environment it is important to know the size of the environment The existing data volume the data growth per year and the backup window all influence selection of the hardware to be deployed

The following table helps determine the data volumes to be backed up

If you know the rate of data growth the total backup volume can be calculated on the basis of the calculated data volume The table below clarifies that when the project is viewed over a period of five years you will want to double the data volume needs to be backed up at the end of the period To determine the right values for the future any examination or analysis should take account of this during planning of the backup and recovery environment

Note The tables are examples and must be viewed individually depending on the unique requirements of the organization

Backups are rarely carried out in the backup environment for 24 hours without interruption because during the day there is often the need to give priority to production applications Backups therefore usually take place outside of business hours in a so-called backup time window To determine the required hardware it is essential to know how much time is available for the backup and the volume of data to be backed up within this time For example if the time is not sufficient for backup onto a tape device the solution must be planned as larger or alternatives such as the snapshot-based backup on memory level (Zero Downtime Backup) must be considered

The HP Storage Sizer provides support in determining the required hardware It plans the right libraries and appropriate StoreOnce system The Sizer tool is available to partners of HP

Tip For successful implementation of a backup and recovery environment an examination of the data in external offices is just as important as information regarding the data in the headquarters For example if the data of the external office are to be replicated as deduplicated in the headquarters the necessary requirements with regard to required capacities for StoreOnce systems and libraries must be met in the headquarters right at the start of the project

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

10

Requirements and recommendations for the HP Data Protector Cell Server

The hardware requirements for HP Data Protector are described in the Quickspecs (link at the end of the document) In addition to the main memory that the operating system requires HP Data Protector requires 256 MB main memory (512 MB recommended) for the Cell Manager For backup jobs running in parallel another 40 MB are required (assuming 10 backups running simultaneously this means 400 MB) 64 MB for the installation server 256 MB for the user interface and 64 MB (128 MB recommended) for the media agent In total and rounded up this totals a requirement of 15 GB main memory Initially there is no requirement in the Quickspecs regarding the number of processors However if the Cell Server is also to function simultaneously as media agent the following general formula applies 1 processor core per media agenttape device to be addressed

If the StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector is used the recommendation is to deploy another 4 to 6 processor cores and 6 GB main memory (exact formula can be found in the Quickspecs)

As a general minimum recommendation and as preparation for any future functions in the software the backup server should have at least 8 processor cores and at least 8 GB main memory Experience has shown that upgrading an existing server rarely makes good sense instead acquisition of the current HP ProLiant server model in each case is recommended

Tip During planning of the backup server attention should be paid to ensuring that the server is procured with more computing performance and main memory than required This allows within the framework of the lifecycle new functions in HP Data Protector that have higher hardware requirements can be integrated (for example integration of the StoreOnce software store)

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

On installation of the Cell Server you are asked which components are to be installed on the system As a rule the proposed selection is the right one for the Cell Server supplemented by the Disaster Recovery component This applies to HP Data Protector versions 7X and 8X

Note Before installation of the corresponding components the support matrices must be checked with regard to compatibility of the versions

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

11

Available components and their significance (depending on deployed version the selection can differ)

bullDisk Agent Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bull(General) Media Agent Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullNDMP Media Agent Supplements the general media agent to include functions for the backups of NDMP storage solutions

bullUser Interface Contains the user interface of HP Data Protector as well as the commands to be run on the command line

bullManager-of-Manager User Interface A special extension of the user interface required for management of a number of interconnected Cell Servers

bullJava User Interface ndash see User Interface Java-based This special user interface is no longer available for DP version 8X or higher

bullHP P9000 XP Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P9000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P6000 EVA SMI-S Agent Agent based on SMI-S standard for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P6000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P4000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P4000 (HP StoreVirtual) (= Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P10000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P10000 (HP 3PAR StoreServ) (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullMS Exchange Integration Enables backup of MS Exchange 2003 Stores

bullMS SQL Integration Enables backup of MS SQL servers via the lsquoVirtual Device Interfacersquo

bullMS SharePoint Integration Enables backup of MS SharePoint servers (ltversion 2007)

bullMS SharePoint Server 20072010 Integration Enables backup of the MS SharePoint farm

bullMS Exchange Server 2010 Integration2010 Enables backup of the databases of Microsoft Exchange 2010 and 2013 servers

bullSAP R3 Integration Agent for backup of SAP (Oracle) databases with BRtools (backint and rman)

bullSAP DB Integration Agent for backing up the MAXDBSAPDB database

bullSAP HANA Integration Agent for backing up SAP HANA in-memory database

bullOracle Integration Agent for backing up Oracle databases

bullSybase Integration Agent for backing up Sybase databases

bullInformix Integration Agent for backing up Informix databases

bullLotus Integration Enables backup of Lotus Notes databases (NSF)

bullDB2 Integration Agent for backing up DB2 databases

bullHP NNM Backup Integration Scripts for backup of an HP Network Node Manager implementation

bullMS Volume Shadow Copy Integration Enables backup of MS applications and file systems via the Microsoft VSS framework (for example MS Exchange 2007)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 7: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

7

operation of the web service also requires connectivity to the internet DNS credit checks possibly an Active Directory possibly a file server and a CRM solution In case of a disaster the entire service must therefore be examined and its data backed up andor safeguarded against failures

Tip In many cases only the central location of the company is examined A backup and recovery strategy for external offices should also be a constituent part of the definition With HP Data Protector and the integrated deduplication technologies or the HP StoreOnce system external offices can be easily included in the overall data protection strategy

How where and what technology should be used to create the backup

HP Data Protector provides a broad spectrum of options to safeguard mission-critical data against disaster A few examples of the possibilities are provided below

bullIntegrations The backup of applications and databases takes place by means of a special agent which ensures that applications are placed in a calm state (backup state) to enable application-consistent data backup In the event of a disaster the application can then be restored including transactions In the case of virtualized environments the complete virtual machine and with the Microsoft VSS framework also the application (for example MS Exchange) can be backed up in the virtual machine by means of the integration

bullDisk staging This is a technology where the data are first of all cached on a hard disk area before they are copied onto a physical tape in a downstream process With simultaneous integration of deduplication a greater number of backups can be kept Disk staging is suitable primarily for backups with a short retention period as with intermediate storage and for rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullIncremental forever Incremental forever refers to a special process in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup Here the backup takes place partially or completely on a hard disk area with regular consolidations of the data stocks ensuring rapid recovery in the event of a disaster

bullDeduplication Deduplication refers to a method of detecting and removing redundancies on block level during the backup when the blocks to be backed up are compared with blocks that have already been backed up This method is holistically integrated into the HP portfolio (HP StoreOnce systems and HP Data Protector) and permits for example complete integration of the external offices into the central backup and recovery strategy of a company

Tip The combination of the different technologies in HP Data Protector provides comprehensive flexibility and optimal support for the company in the possible event of a disaster

Loss of datadowntimes

The extent of loss of data and acceptable recovery times should be determined individually for each system or each service of the company The type and frequency of backups in HP Data Protector can be derived from the data obtained

Tip Please note that patching and upgrading Data Protector doesnrsquot create any downtime

Explanations of some key terms are provided below

bull Recovery Point Objective (RPO) refers to the maximum loss of data in the event of a failure As a rule it is the time interval between two backups This value specifies the maximum volume of transactions or data that can be lost between the last backup and a possible case of disaster

bull Recovery Time Objective (RTO) refers to the agreed recovery time and as a rule is the period between occurrence of a disaster and recovery of the business processes Possible additional activities can be

ndash Hardware provision and recovery of the infrastructure

ndash Connection and configuration of the hardware on the network

ndash Recovery of the operating system

ndash Installation of the backup client software

ndash Identification of the data and information to be reloaded

ndash Identification of the required backup medium and its provision

ndash Data recovery from tape

ndash Recovery of databases

ndash Test and share of the reloaded data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Disaster

LogicalPhysicalHardware (server)SAN switchFirewallNetworkStorageData center (powercooling)

Data deletionData corruptionHuman errorFW updatespatchesSabotage

8

bull The illustration shows an example of how a failure (case of disaster) can occur and what causes it

Tip A list of all servers and services of the company with evaluation of the priorities data volumes backup frequencies and recovery times should be a constituent part of every disaster recovery plan

Retention periods

The retention period refers to the period in which data must be available for recovery With HP Data Protector there are various possibilities for configuring the protection period of a backup ranging from no protection period at all to days weeks months and yearsmdashall the way to permanent protection of the data HP Data Protector is therefore also ideal for long-term data archival though it should not be confused with an archiving solution

For example the legal regulations in Germany based on the type of data (for example documents with significance for tax invoices and annual accounts) and industry sector (for example medical data) range from 6 10 or 20 years up to permanent retention Every company is under obligation to implement and comply with the regulations applicable to that company

Tip To protect against inadvertent overwriting of the tapes (human error) or destruction of the data due to sabotage it is recommended to copy the data onto physical tapes for long-term storage and store these at a suitable location outside of the company

Licenses

Certain functions of HP Data Protector to be used in the planning phase are specified On the basis of these considerations it is easy to determine the required number of functionalities and licenses The HP Storage Sizer tool is available to provide assistance The Storage Sizer tool contains the HP Data Protector software Sizer which can be called up separately

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Data Types Backup To Disk (daily)

Backup to Tape (weekly)

Infrastructure 500 GB 2500 GB

Management 1000 GB 5000 GB

BampR environment 500 GB 2500 GB

File Server 3000 GB 15000 GB

Mail Databases 5000 GB 25000 GB

Databases 2000 GB 10000 GB

Total 12000 GB 60000 GB

Growth Yearly 20 Backup to Tape (monthly) in TB

2014 240

2015 288

2016 346

2017 416

2018 500

9

This application can be used to plan your backup and recovery project The Data Protector environment can be licensed according to the traditional model (one license for each functionality) or the capacity-based model The tool is available to partners of HP

Tip If you do not know at the start of a project which functions of HP Data Protector are to be used all the functions of HP Data Protector can be tested free of charge for a period of 60 days within the framework of an evaluation The software can be downloaded at httpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

Data volume data growth sizing and backup times

To determine which hardware (servers SAN network tape libraries HP StoreOnce systems etc) are required for the backup and recovery environment it is important to know the size of the environment The existing data volume the data growth per year and the backup window all influence selection of the hardware to be deployed

The following table helps determine the data volumes to be backed up

If you know the rate of data growth the total backup volume can be calculated on the basis of the calculated data volume The table below clarifies that when the project is viewed over a period of five years you will want to double the data volume needs to be backed up at the end of the period To determine the right values for the future any examination or analysis should take account of this during planning of the backup and recovery environment

Note The tables are examples and must be viewed individually depending on the unique requirements of the organization

Backups are rarely carried out in the backup environment for 24 hours without interruption because during the day there is often the need to give priority to production applications Backups therefore usually take place outside of business hours in a so-called backup time window To determine the required hardware it is essential to know how much time is available for the backup and the volume of data to be backed up within this time For example if the time is not sufficient for backup onto a tape device the solution must be planned as larger or alternatives such as the snapshot-based backup on memory level (Zero Downtime Backup) must be considered

The HP Storage Sizer provides support in determining the required hardware It plans the right libraries and appropriate StoreOnce system The Sizer tool is available to partners of HP

Tip For successful implementation of a backup and recovery environment an examination of the data in external offices is just as important as information regarding the data in the headquarters For example if the data of the external office are to be replicated as deduplicated in the headquarters the necessary requirements with regard to required capacities for StoreOnce systems and libraries must be met in the headquarters right at the start of the project

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

10

Requirements and recommendations for the HP Data Protector Cell Server

The hardware requirements for HP Data Protector are described in the Quickspecs (link at the end of the document) In addition to the main memory that the operating system requires HP Data Protector requires 256 MB main memory (512 MB recommended) for the Cell Manager For backup jobs running in parallel another 40 MB are required (assuming 10 backups running simultaneously this means 400 MB) 64 MB for the installation server 256 MB for the user interface and 64 MB (128 MB recommended) for the media agent In total and rounded up this totals a requirement of 15 GB main memory Initially there is no requirement in the Quickspecs regarding the number of processors However if the Cell Server is also to function simultaneously as media agent the following general formula applies 1 processor core per media agenttape device to be addressed

If the StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector is used the recommendation is to deploy another 4 to 6 processor cores and 6 GB main memory (exact formula can be found in the Quickspecs)

As a general minimum recommendation and as preparation for any future functions in the software the backup server should have at least 8 processor cores and at least 8 GB main memory Experience has shown that upgrading an existing server rarely makes good sense instead acquisition of the current HP ProLiant server model in each case is recommended

Tip During planning of the backup server attention should be paid to ensuring that the server is procured with more computing performance and main memory than required This allows within the framework of the lifecycle new functions in HP Data Protector that have higher hardware requirements can be integrated (for example integration of the StoreOnce software store)

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

On installation of the Cell Server you are asked which components are to be installed on the system As a rule the proposed selection is the right one for the Cell Server supplemented by the Disaster Recovery component This applies to HP Data Protector versions 7X and 8X

Note Before installation of the corresponding components the support matrices must be checked with regard to compatibility of the versions

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

11

Available components and their significance (depending on deployed version the selection can differ)

bullDisk Agent Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bull(General) Media Agent Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullNDMP Media Agent Supplements the general media agent to include functions for the backups of NDMP storage solutions

bullUser Interface Contains the user interface of HP Data Protector as well as the commands to be run on the command line

bullManager-of-Manager User Interface A special extension of the user interface required for management of a number of interconnected Cell Servers

bullJava User Interface ndash see User Interface Java-based This special user interface is no longer available for DP version 8X or higher

bullHP P9000 XP Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P9000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P6000 EVA SMI-S Agent Agent based on SMI-S standard for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P6000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P4000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P4000 (HP StoreVirtual) (= Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P10000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P10000 (HP 3PAR StoreServ) (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullMS Exchange Integration Enables backup of MS Exchange 2003 Stores

bullMS SQL Integration Enables backup of MS SQL servers via the lsquoVirtual Device Interfacersquo

bullMS SharePoint Integration Enables backup of MS SharePoint servers (ltversion 2007)

bullMS SharePoint Server 20072010 Integration Enables backup of the MS SharePoint farm

bullMS Exchange Server 2010 Integration2010 Enables backup of the databases of Microsoft Exchange 2010 and 2013 servers

bullSAP R3 Integration Agent for backup of SAP (Oracle) databases with BRtools (backint and rman)

bullSAP DB Integration Agent for backing up the MAXDBSAPDB database

bullSAP HANA Integration Agent for backing up SAP HANA in-memory database

bullOracle Integration Agent for backing up Oracle databases

bullSybase Integration Agent for backing up Sybase databases

bullInformix Integration Agent for backing up Informix databases

bullLotus Integration Enables backup of Lotus Notes databases (NSF)

bullDB2 Integration Agent for backing up DB2 databases

bullHP NNM Backup Integration Scripts for backup of an HP Network Node Manager implementation

bullMS Volume Shadow Copy Integration Enables backup of MS applications and file systems via the Microsoft VSS framework (for example MS Exchange 2007)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 8: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

Disaster

LogicalPhysicalHardware (server)SAN switchFirewallNetworkStorageData center (powercooling)

Data deletionData corruptionHuman errorFW updatespatchesSabotage

8

bull The illustration shows an example of how a failure (case of disaster) can occur and what causes it

Tip A list of all servers and services of the company with evaluation of the priorities data volumes backup frequencies and recovery times should be a constituent part of every disaster recovery plan

Retention periods

The retention period refers to the period in which data must be available for recovery With HP Data Protector there are various possibilities for configuring the protection period of a backup ranging from no protection period at all to days weeks months and yearsmdashall the way to permanent protection of the data HP Data Protector is therefore also ideal for long-term data archival though it should not be confused with an archiving solution

For example the legal regulations in Germany based on the type of data (for example documents with significance for tax invoices and annual accounts) and industry sector (for example medical data) range from 6 10 or 20 years up to permanent retention Every company is under obligation to implement and comply with the regulations applicable to that company

Tip To protect against inadvertent overwriting of the tapes (human error) or destruction of the data due to sabotage it is recommended to copy the data onto physical tapes for long-term storage and store these at a suitable location outside of the company

Licenses

Certain functions of HP Data Protector to be used in the planning phase are specified On the basis of these considerations it is easy to determine the required number of functionalities and licenses The HP Storage Sizer tool is available to provide assistance The Storage Sizer tool contains the HP Data Protector software Sizer which can be called up separately

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Data Types Backup To Disk (daily)

Backup to Tape (weekly)

Infrastructure 500 GB 2500 GB

Management 1000 GB 5000 GB

BampR environment 500 GB 2500 GB

File Server 3000 GB 15000 GB

Mail Databases 5000 GB 25000 GB

Databases 2000 GB 10000 GB

Total 12000 GB 60000 GB

Growth Yearly 20 Backup to Tape (monthly) in TB

2014 240

2015 288

2016 346

2017 416

2018 500

9

This application can be used to plan your backup and recovery project The Data Protector environment can be licensed according to the traditional model (one license for each functionality) or the capacity-based model The tool is available to partners of HP

Tip If you do not know at the start of a project which functions of HP Data Protector are to be used all the functions of HP Data Protector can be tested free of charge for a period of 60 days within the framework of an evaluation The software can be downloaded at httpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

Data volume data growth sizing and backup times

To determine which hardware (servers SAN network tape libraries HP StoreOnce systems etc) are required for the backup and recovery environment it is important to know the size of the environment The existing data volume the data growth per year and the backup window all influence selection of the hardware to be deployed

The following table helps determine the data volumes to be backed up

If you know the rate of data growth the total backup volume can be calculated on the basis of the calculated data volume The table below clarifies that when the project is viewed over a period of five years you will want to double the data volume needs to be backed up at the end of the period To determine the right values for the future any examination or analysis should take account of this during planning of the backup and recovery environment

Note The tables are examples and must be viewed individually depending on the unique requirements of the organization

Backups are rarely carried out in the backup environment for 24 hours without interruption because during the day there is often the need to give priority to production applications Backups therefore usually take place outside of business hours in a so-called backup time window To determine the required hardware it is essential to know how much time is available for the backup and the volume of data to be backed up within this time For example if the time is not sufficient for backup onto a tape device the solution must be planned as larger or alternatives such as the snapshot-based backup on memory level (Zero Downtime Backup) must be considered

The HP Storage Sizer provides support in determining the required hardware It plans the right libraries and appropriate StoreOnce system The Sizer tool is available to partners of HP

Tip For successful implementation of a backup and recovery environment an examination of the data in external offices is just as important as information regarding the data in the headquarters For example if the data of the external office are to be replicated as deduplicated in the headquarters the necessary requirements with regard to required capacities for StoreOnce systems and libraries must be met in the headquarters right at the start of the project

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

10

Requirements and recommendations for the HP Data Protector Cell Server

The hardware requirements for HP Data Protector are described in the Quickspecs (link at the end of the document) In addition to the main memory that the operating system requires HP Data Protector requires 256 MB main memory (512 MB recommended) for the Cell Manager For backup jobs running in parallel another 40 MB are required (assuming 10 backups running simultaneously this means 400 MB) 64 MB for the installation server 256 MB for the user interface and 64 MB (128 MB recommended) for the media agent In total and rounded up this totals a requirement of 15 GB main memory Initially there is no requirement in the Quickspecs regarding the number of processors However if the Cell Server is also to function simultaneously as media agent the following general formula applies 1 processor core per media agenttape device to be addressed

If the StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector is used the recommendation is to deploy another 4 to 6 processor cores and 6 GB main memory (exact formula can be found in the Quickspecs)

As a general minimum recommendation and as preparation for any future functions in the software the backup server should have at least 8 processor cores and at least 8 GB main memory Experience has shown that upgrading an existing server rarely makes good sense instead acquisition of the current HP ProLiant server model in each case is recommended

Tip During planning of the backup server attention should be paid to ensuring that the server is procured with more computing performance and main memory than required This allows within the framework of the lifecycle new functions in HP Data Protector that have higher hardware requirements can be integrated (for example integration of the StoreOnce software store)

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

On installation of the Cell Server you are asked which components are to be installed on the system As a rule the proposed selection is the right one for the Cell Server supplemented by the Disaster Recovery component This applies to HP Data Protector versions 7X and 8X

Note Before installation of the corresponding components the support matrices must be checked with regard to compatibility of the versions

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

11

Available components and their significance (depending on deployed version the selection can differ)

bullDisk Agent Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bull(General) Media Agent Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullNDMP Media Agent Supplements the general media agent to include functions for the backups of NDMP storage solutions

bullUser Interface Contains the user interface of HP Data Protector as well as the commands to be run on the command line

bullManager-of-Manager User Interface A special extension of the user interface required for management of a number of interconnected Cell Servers

bullJava User Interface ndash see User Interface Java-based This special user interface is no longer available for DP version 8X or higher

bullHP P9000 XP Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P9000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P6000 EVA SMI-S Agent Agent based on SMI-S standard for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P6000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P4000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P4000 (HP StoreVirtual) (= Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P10000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P10000 (HP 3PAR StoreServ) (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullMS Exchange Integration Enables backup of MS Exchange 2003 Stores

bullMS SQL Integration Enables backup of MS SQL servers via the lsquoVirtual Device Interfacersquo

bullMS SharePoint Integration Enables backup of MS SharePoint servers (ltversion 2007)

bullMS SharePoint Server 20072010 Integration Enables backup of the MS SharePoint farm

bullMS Exchange Server 2010 Integration2010 Enables backup of the databases of Microsoft Exchange 2010 and 2013 servers

bullSAP R3 Integration Agent for backup of SAP (Oracle) databases with BRtools (backint and rman)

bullSAP DB Integration Agent for backing up the MAXDBSAPDB database

bullSAP HANA Integration Agent for backing up SAP HANA in-memory database

bullOracle Integration Agent for backing up Oracle databases

bullSybase Integration Agent for backing up Sybase databases

bullInformix Integration Agent for backing up Informix databases

bullLotus Integration Enables backup of Lotus Notes databases (NSF)

bullDB2 Integration Agent for backing up DB2 databases

bullHP NNM Backup Integration Scripts for backup of an HP Network Node Manager implementation

bullMS Volume Shadow Copy Integration Enables backup of MS applications and file systems via the Microsoft VSS framework (for example MS Exchange 2007)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 9: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

Data Types Backup To Disk (daily)

Backup to Tape (weekly)

Infrastructure 500 GB 2500 GB

Management 1000 GB 5000 GB

BampR environment 500 GB 2500 GB

File Server 3000 GB 15000 GB

Mail Databases 5000 GB 25000 GB

Databases 2000 GB 10000 GB

Total 12000 GB 60000 GB

Growth Yearly 20 Backup to Tape (monthly) in TB

2014 240

2015 288

2016 346

2017 416

2018 500

9

This application can be used to plan your backup and recovery project The Data Protector environment can be licensed according to the traditional model (one license for each functionality) or the capacity-based model The tool is available to partners of HP

Tip If you do not know at the start of a project which functions of HP Data Protector are to be used all the functions of HP Data Protector can be tested free of charge for a period of 60 days within the framework of an evaluation The software can be downloaded at httpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

Data volume data growth sizing and backup times

To determine which hardware (servers SAN network tape libraries HP StoreOnce systems etc) are required for the backup and recovery environment it is important to know the size of the environment The existing data volume the data growth per year and the backup window all influence selection of the hardware to be deployed

The following table helps determine the data volumes to be backed up

If you know the rate of data growth the total backup volume can be calculated on the basis of the calculated data volume The table below clarifies that when the project is viewed over a period of five years you will want to double the data volume needs to be backed up at the end of the period To determine the right values for the future any examination or analysis should take account of this during planning of the backup and recovery environment

Note The tables are examples and must be viewed individually depending on the unique requirements of the organization

Backups are rarely carried out in the backup environment for 24 hours without interruption because during the day there is often the need to give priority to production applications Backups therefore usually take place outside of business hours in a so-called backup time window To determine the required hardware it is essential to know how much time is available for the backup and the volume of data to be backed up within this time For example if the time is not sufficient for backup onto a tape device the solution must be planned as larger or alternatives such as the snapshot-based backup on memory level (Zero Downtime Backup) must be considered

The HP Storage Sizer provides support in determining the required hardware It plans the right libraries and appropriate StoreOnce system The Sizer tool is available to partners of HP

Tip For successful implementation of a backup and recovery environment an examination of the data in external offices is just as important as information regarding the data in the headquarters For example if the data of the external office are to be replicated as deduplicated in the headquarters the necessary requirements with regard to required capacities for StoreOnce systems and libraries must be met in the headquarters right at the start of the project

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

10

Requirements and recommendations for the HP Data Protector Cell Server

The hardware requirements for HP Data Protector are described in the Quickspecs (link at the end of the document) In addition to the main memory that the operating system requires HP Data Protector requires 256 MB main memory (512 MB recommended) for the Cell Manager For backup jobs running in parallel another 40 MB are required (assuming 10 backups running simultaneously this means 400 MB) 64 MB for the installation server 256 MB for the user interface and 64 MB (128 MB recommended) for the media agent In total and rounded up this totals a requirement of 15 GB main memory Initially there is no requirement in the Quickspecs regarding the number of processors However if the Cell Server is also to function simultaneously as media agent the following general formula applies 1 processor core per media agenttape device to be addressed

If the StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector is used the recommendation is to deploy another 4 to 6 processor cores and 6 GB main memory (exact formula can be found in the Quickspecs)

As a general minimum recommendation and as preparation for any future functions in the software the backup server should have at least 8 processor cores and at least 8 GB main memory Experience has shown that upgrading an existing server rarely makes good sense instead acquisition of the current HP ProLiant server model in each case is recommended

Tip During planning of the backup server attention should be paid to ensuring that the server is procured with more computing performance and main memory than required This allows within the framework of the lifecycle new functions in HP Data Protector that have higher hardware requirements can be integrated (for example integration of the StoreOnce software store)

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

On installation of the Cell Server you are asked which components are to be installed on the system As a rule the proposed selection is the right one for the Cell Server supplemented by the Disaster Recovery component This applies to HP Data Protector versions 7X and 8X

Note Before installation of the corresponding components the support matrices must be checked with regard to compatibility of the versions

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

11

Available components and their significance (depending on deployed version the selection can differ)

bullDisk Agent Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bull(General) Media Agent Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullNDMP Media Agent Supplements the general media agent to include functions for the backups of NDMP storage solutions

bullUser Interface Contains the user interface of HP Data Protector as well as the commands to be run on the command line

bullManager-of-Manager User Interface A special extension of the user interface required for management of a number of interconnected Cell Servers

bullJava User Interface ndash see User Interface Java-based This special user interface is no longer available for DP version 8X or higher

bullHP P9000 XP Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P9000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P6000 EVA SMI-S Agent Agent based on SMI-S standard for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P6000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P4000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P4000 (HP StoreVirtual) (= Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P10000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P10000 (HP 3PAR StoreServ) (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullMS Exchange Integration Enables backup of MS Exchange 2003 Stores

bullMS SQL Integration Enables backup of MS SQL servers via the lsquoVirtual Device Interfacersquo

bullMS SharePoint Integration Enables backup of MS SharePoint servers (ltversion 2007)

bullMS SharePoint Server 20072010 Integration Enables backup of the MS SharePoint farm

bullMS Exchange Server 2010 Integration2010 Enables backup of the databases of Microsoft Exchange 2010 and 2013 servers

bullSAP R3 Integration Agent for backup of SAP (Oracle) databases with BRtools (backint and rman)

bullSAP DB Integration Agent for backing up the MAXDBSAPDB database

bullSAP HANA Integration Agent for backing up SAP HANA in-memory database

bullOracle Integration Agent for backing up Oracle databases

bullSybase Integration Agent for backing up Sybase databases

bullInformix Integration Agent for backing up Informix databases

bullLotus Integration Enables backup of Lotus Notes databases (NSF)

bullDB2 Integration Agent for backing up DB2 databases

bullHP NNM Backup Integration Scripts for backup of an HP Network Node Manager implementation

bullMS Volume Shadow Copy Integration Enables backup of MS applications and file systems via the Microsoft VSS framework (for example MS Exchange 2007)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 10: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

10

Requirements and recommendations for the HP Data Protector Cell Server

The hardware requirements for HP Data Protector are described in the Quickspecs (link at the end of the document) In addition to the main memory that the operating system requires HP Data Protector requires 256 MB main memory (512 MB recommended) for the Cell Manager For backup jobs running in parallel another 40 MB are required (assuming 10 backups running simultaneously this means 400 MB) 64 MB for the installation server 256 MB for the user interface and 64 MB (128 MB recommended) for the media agent In total and rounded up this totals a requirement of 15 GB main memory Initially there is no requirement in the Quickspecs regarding the number of processors However if the Cell Server is also to function simultaneously as media agent the following general formula applies 1 processor core per media agenttape device to be addressed

If the StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector is used the recommendation is to deploy another 4 to 6 processor cores and 6 GB main memory (exact formula can be found in the Quickspecs)

As a general minimum recommendation and as preparation for any future functions in the software the backup server should have at least 8 processor cores and at least 8 GB main memory Experience has shown that upgrading an existing server rarely makes good sense instead acquisition of the current HP ProLiant server model in each case is recommended

Tip During planning of the backup server attention should be paid to ensuring that the server is procured with more computing performance and main memory than required This allows within the framework of the lifecycle new functions in HP Data Protector that have higher hardware requirements can be integrated (for example integration of the StoreOnce software store)

Which DP components are required and what is their purpose

On installation of the Cell Server you are asked which components are to be installed on the system As a rule the proposed selection is the right one for the Cell Server supplemented by the Disaster Recovery component This applies to HP Data Protector versions 7X and 8X

Note Before installation of the corresponding components the support matrices must be checked with regard to compatibility of the versions

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

11

Available components and their significance (depending on deployed version the selection can differ)

bullDisk Agent Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bull(General) Media Agent Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullNDMP Media Agent Supplements the general media agent to include functions for the backups of NDMP storage solutions

bullUser Interface Contains the user interface of HP Data Protector as well as the commands to be run on the command line

bullManager-of-Manager User Interface A special extension of the user interface required for management of a number of interconnected Cell Servers

bullJava User Interface ndash see User Interface Java-based This special user interface is no longer available for DP version 8X or higher

bullHP P9000 XP Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P9000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P6000 EVA SMI-S Agent Agent based on SMI-S standard for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P6000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P4000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P4000 (HP StoreVirtual) (= Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P10000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P10000 (HP 3PAR StoreServ) (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullMS Exchange Integration Enables backup of MS Exchange 2003 Stores

bullMS SQL Integration Enables backup of MS SQL servers via the lsquoVirtual Device Interfacersquo

bullMS SharePoint Integration Enables backup of MS SharePoint servers (ltversion 2007)

bullMS SharePoint Server 20072010 Integration Enables backup of the MS SharePoint farm

bullMS Exchange Server 2010 Integration2010 Enables backup of the databases of Microsoft Exchange 2010 and 2013 servers

bullSAP R3 Integration Agent for backup of SAP (Oracle) databases with BRtools (backint and rman)

bullSAP DB Integration Agent for backing up the MAXDBSAPDB database

bullSAP HANA Integration Agent for backing up SAP HANA in-memory database

bullOracle Integration Agent for backing up Oracle databases

bullSybase Integration Agent for backing up Sybase databases

bullInformix Integration Agent for backing up Informix databases

bullLotus Integration Enables backup of Lotus Notes databases (NSF)

bullDB2 Integration Agent for backing up DB2 databases

bullHP NNM Backup Integration Scripts for backup of an HP Network Node Manager implementation

bullMS Volume Shadow Copy Integration Enables backup of MS applications and file systems via the Microsoft VSS framework (for example MS Exchange 2007)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 11: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

11

Available components and their significance (depending on deployed version the selection can differ)

bullDisk Agent Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bull(General) Media Agent Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullNDMP Media Agent Supplements the general media agent to include functions for the backups of NDMP storage solutions

bullUser Interface Contains the user interface of HP Data Protector as well as the commands to be run on the command line

bullManager-of-Manager User Interface A special extension of the user interface required for management of a number of interconnected Cell Servers

bullJava User Interface ndash see User Interface Java-based This special user interface is no longer available for DP version 8X or higher

bullHP P9000 XP Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P9000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P6000 EVA SMI-S Agent Agent based on SMI-S standard for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P6000 (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P4000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P4000 (HP StoreVirtual) (= Zero Downtime Backup)

bullHP P10000 Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of the HP P10000 (HP 3PAR StoreServ) (=Zero Downtime Backup)

bullMS Exchange Integration Enables backup of MS Exchange 2003 Stores

bullMS SQL Integration Enables backup of MS SQL servers via the lsquoVirtual Device Interfacersquo

bullMS SharePoint Integration Enables backup of MS SharePoint servers (ltversion 2007)

bullMS SharePoint Server 20072010 Integration Enables backup of the MS SharePoint farm

bullMS Exchange Server 2010 Integration2010 Enables backup of the databases of Microsoft Exchange 2010 and 2013 servers

bullSAP R3 Integration Agent for backup of SAP (Oracle) databases with BRtools (backint and rman)

bullSAP DB Integration Agent for backing up the MAXDBSAPDB database

bullSAP HANA Integration Agent for backing up SAP HANA in-memory database

bullOracle Integration Agent for backing up Oracle databases

bullSybase Integration Agent for backing up Sybase databases

bullInformix Integration Agent for backing up Informix databases

bullLotus Integration Enables backup of Lotus Notes databases (NSF)

bullDB2 Integration Agent for backing up DB2 databases

bullHP NNM Backup Integration Scripts for backup of an HP Network Node Manager implementation

bullMS Volume Shadow Copy Integration Enables backup of MS applications and file systems via the Microsoft VSS framework (for example MS Exchange 2007)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 12: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

12

bullVMware Integration (legacy) Integration for backing up virtual machines lt ESX 5

bullEMC Symetrix Agent Agent for snapshot backups of file systems of an EMC Symetrix storage solution

bullAutomatic Disaster Recovery Module Module for backup of the system states of a server as preparation for the recovery of a system with the Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery method

bullDocumentation Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or simple Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullVLS Automigration In the case of a library connected directly to the HP VLS system enables automatic migration (copy job) of the virtual tapes onto physical media

bullVirtual Environment Integration Enables backups of virtual machines for VMware and Hyper-V (XEN via scripts)

bullStoreOnce Software Deduplication Enables the integration of a StoreOnce software store in HP Data Protector

bullMS Exchange Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a Microsoft Exchange backup (for example mail and calendar objects ndash only for 20102013)

bullMS SharePoint Granular Recovery Extension Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a SharePoint backup (for example Sites ndash only for 20072010)

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Agent Agent for the recovery of individual objects from a VMware backup (for example a file in a virtual machine

bullVMware Granular Recovery Extension Web Plug-In Plug-in for integration of the VMware Granular Recovery Extension into the VMware vCenter

Tip Only the required components are installed on the Cell Server These include the Media Agent Disk Agent User Interface Documentation Installation Server and Automatic Disaster Recovery Module (Microsoft Windows) Attention should be paid to ensuring that the Cell Server is only used for backup and recovery tasks The installation of other applications on the backup server endangers the calculated or specified backup and recovery times

What is a patch bundle and what order is required for updates

No software is free of errors which is why updates for HP Data Protector are made available at regular intervals to rectify known problems or integrate new functions into the software for example support for a new operating system

Note A valid maintenance contract is required to download the updates from the HP website and their installation

A patch bundle is a collection of different related updates The installation of the patch bundle is automated Under certain circumstances individual updates that are released later require the installation of a patch bundle It is therefore recommended that you read the corresponding patch description before installation

Depending on availability individual updates must always be installed in the following order

bullCore ndash The most important constituent parts of HP Data Protector

bullCell Server ndash All components relevant to the Cell Server

bullCell Console ndash Constituent parts of the user interface

bullDisk Agent ndash Enables backup of the file systems of the backup clients

bullMedia Agent ndash Enables access and data transfer to tape devices and tape libraries as well as data transfer to backup-to-disk devices

bullDocumentation ndash Contains the complete documentation and help system in English French Japanese or Simplified Chinese The language integrations vary in the currently supported HP Data Protector versions

bullIntegrations ndash All integrations (Microsoft Exchange VE Oracle SQL etc)

Tip The updates should be installed directly after installation of the Cell Server and before the clients to be backed up are installed When downloading and saving the updates it helps to extend the file name with a description (for example DA or MA for disk agent or media agent)

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 13: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

13

How is HP Data Protector software installed on the server that requires a backup

Tip A check of the name resolution for the server to be set up should be carried out before installation of the software A successful so-called lsquoforwardrsquo and lsquoreversersquo DNS lookup for the backup client and backup server must be possible This prevents later errors in the backup and recovery environment

HP Data Protector software is installed on the backup clients via its user interface For some systems the installation is carried out per script (Novell NetWare) or manually and locally (for example Microsoft Cluster and OpenVMS) Under certain circumstances it can be necessary for distribution of the software on MS Windows 2008 Servers using the command omniinetpasswd to add a user with administrative rights on the Cell Server (see help with the error message lsquoCannot connect to SCM ndash Service Control Managerrsquo)

Further preparatory steps are necessary for the installation of Linux or Unix clients via the user interface of HP Data Protector such as

bull Setting up a Linux or Unix installation server

bull Adaptation of the file omnirc on the installation server

bull Creation of a public key and distribution of the key on the Linux or Unix servers to be backed up in the file authorized_keys

bull Setting up an SSH connection to the server to be backed up to accept the host key

Once these steps have been carried out the Linux and Unix servers can also be installed via the Data Protector GUI

Tip The backup clients should only be installed once all the necessary updates have been installed on the Cell Server andor installation server This accelerates the installation of the software on the clients A client receives only the required components As a rule the disk agent and the automatic disaster recovery module are sufficient for backup of the file systems The integration agents are only installed if backups of applications such as Microsoft Exchange or Oracle are desired If an integration agent is installed but not used Data Protector still requests a license If no more licenses are available a missing license is indicated in the list of licenses of Data Protector

File lsquoglobalrsquo

The file lsquoglobalrsquo contains important configuration parameters for the backup environment and has effects on the characteristics of the entire cell

Storage location of the file on the Cell Server is the directory Data_Protector_program_dataConfigserveroptions or Data_Protector_homeConfigserveroptions for Windows systems and etcoptomniserveroptions for Linux and Unix systems Following any changes to the file the services have to be restarted on the Cell Server

Tip With the introduction of version 8X of HP Data Protector adaptation of the file lsquoglobalrsquo is possible via the HP Data Protector user interface

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoglobalrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as expedient as a result of experience gained in different installations

bullMaxBSessions=25 ndash Increases the default limitation of 5 possible backups running simultaneously to 25 This limitation was already raised to the value 100 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullSchedulerGranularity=1 ndash Enables starting of jobs every minute in HP Data Protector (instead of the default setting of every 15 minutes)

bullOb2TapeStatistics=1 ndash This setting means that statistics regarding the use of the tapes are written in the file lsquomedialogrsquo

bullDCDirAllocation=1 ndash If a number of DCBF directory are used (setting in the internal database) this parameter determines the even distribution according to site of new DCBF files

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 14: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

14

bullFileMediumCapacity=100000 ndash Where file devices are used (null device media or jukebox media) the limitation for the medium is 100 MB Adapting the value avoids among other things mount requests

bullSmLogStartStop=1 ndash With this option the Session Manager process logs the start and end times in the file smlog

bull AuditLogEnable=1 ndash This option is used to collect audit information

bullAuditLogRetention=90 ndash This parameter specifies the number of months that the audit information is to be collected in the internal database

bullSMTPSenderAddress=lte-mail sendergt ndash This option specifies the sender address for sending email through HP Data Protector

bullSMTPServer=ltSMTP servergt ndash Input of an SMTP server (mail gateway mail relay Microsoft Exchange server) enables HP Data Protector to send emails

bullRecoveryIndexDir=FullPathToTheBackupDir ndash Specifies a backup directory for the file lsquoobrindexdatrsquo and contains information regarding the backup of the internal database and the drive and medium used It is useful as information in a disaster recovery scenario

bullDailyMaintenanceTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1200 midday If backups are running at this point in time the time for maintenance can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo or 9999 disables this task

bullDailyCheckTime=HHMM ndash The default value is 1230 If backups are running at this point in time the time for the daily checks can be shifted accordingly Specifying ldquoNonerdquo disables this task

bullSmDeviceErrorThreshold=5 ndash Specifies the number of unknown errors with a backup device before the device is automatically disable The default value is 0

bullSessionStatusWhenNoObjectToCopy=2 ndash Specifies in the case of a copy job where there were no objects to copy whether or not the session is shown as successful The default value is 0 and terminates the backup with the status ldquoFailedrdquo and a critical error

bullSessSuccessfulWhenNoObjectsBackedUp=1 ndash Specifies whether the backup is to be terminated as successful (1) or defective (0) if no objects could be backed up This option is very helpful for transaction backups

bullMountDelay=90 ndash Specifies how many minutes the backup with an active mount request waits for user interaction before the corresponding mount script is executed The default value is 30 minutes

bullSmWaitForDevice=180 ndash The parameter specifies how many minutes a backup is to wait for a free drive (lsquoWaiting for devices to get freersquo) When the time has elapsed the backup is aborted The default value is 60 minutes

bull CopyAutomatedMaxObjects=2500 ndash Specifies how many objects are to be copied simultaneously in one copy job This option is very helpful for transaction backups onto a hard disk area The default value is 500 objects This limitation was raised to the value 2500 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullFreePoolDeallocFreq=4 ndash The value specifies how many times a day the media pools are to be checked for free tapes in order to move them into a free pool The default value 1 (=000) 4 means 0000 0600 1200 1800 This value was raised to the value 4 with HP Data Protector 8X

bullMMFairLimit=95 ndash This value specifies the percentage the overwrite operations or number of valid months a medium is marked as lsquofairrsquo As default for LTO media the number of overwrite operations is 250 and for the validity of the media 36 months

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the cell or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector an adjustment and extension of the variables take place during the installation procedure

File omnircomnirc

The file lsquoomnircomnircrsquo contains configuration parameters and has an effect on the characteristics of the backup client during backup or recovery Depending on the operating system changes in the file can have a positive effect on the performance of the backups and thus shorten the backup or recovery times

Storage location of the file on the client is the directory Data_Protector_program_data or Data_Protector_home for Microsoft Windows and optomni for Linux and Unix systems (Mac Novell and other Unix systems such as IBM-AIX differ) Changes to the file are used for the next backup or recovery operation as a rule it is not required to restart the services

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 15: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

15

As default the file is not present on any of the systems in the cell it must first be created from the template (omnirctmpl)

The file should be created not only on the Cell Server but also on each media agent and disk agent (client to be backed up) For Unix the parameters recommend below can differ

Note Changes should only be made to the file lsquoomnircrsquo after careful planning and after reading the parameter description in the file The values for the individual parameters can deviate from the suggestions in each customer situation and must be regarded separately for each environment but do not have to be complete in all cases

The parameters that have often proved to be effective in practice are listed below in no particular order They were regarded as faster as a result of experience gained in different installations

Settings for the media agent

bullOB2DEVMUTEXTIMEOUT=12000 ndash Deals with timeouts (2 minutes) for mutex locks (parallel access of several process for example on the robotics) as default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCNOSENDRECVLOOP=1 ndash The variable was introduced with DP 62X and it rectifies a problem in the case of slow backups on a Windows 2008 media agent As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2COMPRESSIONRETRY=10 ndash Specifies how many attempts are to be made to determine the compression capability of the tape device The default value is 1

bullOB2AUTODDTIMEOUT=300 ndash The parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds are required to search backup devices in SAN environments The default value is 600 seconds

bullOB2FILELIBDISKFULL=1 ndash With use of a number of drives of a file library that write into the same directory the specified memory space in MB is kept available in the event of a full hard disk The default value is 0 and the hard disk runs full

bullOB2NOREPACKAGEWARNING=1 ndash Deals with a problem in the case of copy jobs of devices with a small block size on devices with greater block size It was introduced in DP 60 and as default is not available in version 7

bullOB2MACHECKCAPACITY=1 ndash With this variable HP Data Protector attempts to determine the possible capacity of LTO devices The default value is 0

Settings for the disk agent or installation server

bullOB2SHMIPC=0 ndash The value 0 means that the Media Agent Disk Agent and Cell Manager establish the connections via the shared memory area As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2IPCKEEPALIVE=1 ndash The value means that IPC connections remain open permanently instead of opening temporarily and closing As default the parameter is not available

bullOB2SKIPDIRECTORY=1 ndash Permits the skipping of directories during the backup instead of only individual files

bullOB2NOREMOTEWARNINGS=1 ndash This parameter is required under Linux and Unix it prevents an error message if a file system that contains a mount point onto a local file system or a file system connected per NFS is to be backed up

bullOB2_SSH_ENABLED=1 ndash The variable is required for a Linux or Unix installation server and specifies that the installation server is to run the remote installation via the SSH protocol As default lsquorshrsquo and lsquorexecrsquo are used

bullOB2FWPASSTHRU=1 ndash The variable is required for a Windows installation server so that the bootstrap service can register with the Windows firewall Under certain circumstances the default value 0 means that the required ports have be added manually on the client

bullOB2NOTREEWALK=1 ndash Under Windows this prevents the first treewalk before the backup to be made (browsing the directories for data to be backed up) and accelerates the backup of servers with a large number of small files

Tip Changes to the file should be made directly after the installation before the environment is deployed When updates are loaded it should be checked in the corresnotponding description of the patches whether variables have to be changed to achieve certain characteristics of the client or whether they are no longer required In the case of major versions of HP Data Protector there is no adjustment or extension of the variables during the installation procedure Adaptations must be carried out manually after the installation

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 16: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

16

Block size

Increasing the block size to for example 256 kB or 512 kB can considerably increase the throughput of a data backup

During data backup the data are not written continuously onto the tape rather they are divided into segnotments The segments here are not written onto a device in one operation rather in smaller units as blocks The default size of the blocks for HP Data Protector on installation is 64 kB for all device types This value applies to DP 7X for DP 8X the default is 256 kB

In a test with a backup of 40 GB onto a null device the performance with a block size of 512 kB was virtually 25 higher than with default values

The block size depends on the deployed operating system the device used for data backup and the adapter used (SCSI SAS FC HBA) When an iSCSI tape device is used in the Windows environment (virtual or physical) for example the registry must be modified first to enable a larger block size On using the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function it is important to bear in mind that Windows is only able to use larger blocks when the drivers for the tape drives have been loaded As this is not possible during the disaster recovery operation because the connected devices have to be addressed with a block size of 64 K during the backup itself This applies to the Cell Server and possibly also to the media agent Therefore there must be a check beforehand as to what size is supported by the environment because if the selected block size is too large HP Data Protector is unable to restore data from a device configured in this way

Also bear in mind that the block size must be changed before formatting the tapes as the block size is written in the medium header of the tape so that HP Data Protector recognizes the block size to be used on loading the tape If the block size on the tape and the device are different error messages can occur

A block size of 512 kB is recommended for data backups on an HP StoreOnce system or with use of the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector

How is the block size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to lsquoTab Sizersquo and set the desired block size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

A block size of 64 kB is recommended for backups of the data of the media agents (including Cell Server) However in order to achieve better performance for the backup of the other servers to be backed up another logical drive with a high block size can be created in HP Data Protector A number of logical drives can be created on a physical drive the logical drives differ here with regard to the names and selected properties for example the block size The device lock name however should be identical for the logical drives

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 17: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

17

Tip A block size of at least 256 kB and (depending on the operating system) of 512 kB is recommended for the best performance and has proven effective in practice If the lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo function is used for media agents an additional logical drive with the default block size of 64 kB is to be used

Segment Size

Increasing the segment size can have a decisive influence on the performance of the data backup and data recovery

A tape or medium is divided into segments data segments catalogue segments and a header segment The header information of the tape is stored in the header segment and has the same size as the block size Data are stored in blocks within the data segments Information regarding the data segments is stored in the relevant catalogue segment The information regarding the data segments is initially stored in the memory of the media agent and subsequently written into the catalogue segment as well as the internal database

The optimal size of the segment depends on the media type used and the type of data to be backed up A greater segment size can improve the backup speed The information regarding segments is written into the catalogue segment whereby the catalogue size is limited to 12 MB () In the case of backups of a large number of small files under certain circumstances the segment can be completed sooner

Changeable in omnirc file - OB2OMNIMAXCATALOG

Note Although a larger segment size can improve the backup speed it can slow down the recovery speed as the data blocks are found more quickly if the restore is run from a tape with a smaller segment size

How is the segment size changedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired segment size Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The default segment size for LTO drives is 2000 MB It is recommended to test the performance of the backups for LTO drives in each environment and to increase the size depending on the LTO type used

Tip A segment size of 8000 for LTO drives is a good start value for other performance tests and will also lead to an increase in the backup speed with acceptable performance for recoveries if current LTO-6 drive technology is used

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 18: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

18

Diskagentbuffers

HP Data Protector stores the data in memory before transferring it Depending on the concurrency the memory is divided into buffers Per default each buffer consists of 8 disk agent buffers that are the same size as the block size Increasing the number of disk agent buffers does not significantly enhance performance However if the network bandwidth in the case of backups via the network fluctuates greatly an increase in the number of disk agent buffers can ensure that the media agent always receives sufficient data to operate the drive that is used in the streaming mode A reduction in the number of disk agent buffers is necessary if the media agent does not have sufficient shared memory

HowarethediskagentbufferschangedIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dianotlogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired number of disk agent buffers Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Tip The value 16 for the number of disk agent buffers has proven effective in practice when carrying out network backups

Concurrencymultiplexing

The optimal setting of the disk agent concurrency in combination with the number of drives to be used for the backup enables a considerable enhancement of the backup speed

The number of disk agents started per media agent is referred to as disk agent concurrency The number to be used can be set in the properties of the drive and in the backup specification A value in the backup specification overwrites the value set on the drive HP Data Protector sets a default concurrency when setting up the drives depending on the drive type used The default value for LTO drives is 4 if file libraries are used the default value is 3 The maximum value that can be set is 32 Depending on the backup that is run the value can be even lower For example the value 1 is specified in the backup specification for the backup of a Microsoft Exchange server via the network

For the backup of a large number of lsquoslowrsquo servers in the network adjustment of the concurrency is an advantage because the total runtime backup can be greatly reduced and better use can be made of the available network bandwidth However keep in mind that a value that is set too high can lead to fluctuations in the speed of network backups It is recommended to set the value in such a way that at least the drive can be operated in the streaming mode and only set high enough so that the drive that is used reaches saturation The table in section lsquoLAN vs SAN Backupsrsquo is the basis for this

Note For the backup onto an HP StoreOnce system or if the HP StoreOnce software store within HP Data Protector is used the concurrency is to be set to 1 to enable effective deduplication of the data flow To enhance the backup speed it is recommended to increase the number of drives for the backup If a high concurrency is used during the backup the restoration can be slower as the data to be restored are fragmented on the tape

How is the disk agent concurrency changedbullPossibility 1 ndash per drive In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo Extend the

devices and if necessary the libraries then select a drive and the properties of the drive In the lsquoSettingsrsquo tab open lsquoAdvancedrsquo In the displayed dialogue switch to the lsquoSizesrsquo tab and set the desired concurrency Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 19: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

19

bullPossibility2ndashperdriveinthebackupspecification In the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo (the same description applies to the jobs in the context object operations) Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoTargetrsquo tab extend the library if necessary and open the properties of the drive In the displayed dialogue set the desired concurrency in the lsquoGeneralrsquo tab Then confirm the changes with lsquoOKrsquo and in the result area save the changes with lsquoApplyrsquo

The optimal value for the disk agent concurrency depends heavily on the type of data to be backed up on the drive and media types and the amount of serversmount points to be backed up A value that is set too high can influence the restoration speed as the data on the tape are fragmented which causes more rewind time for the tape This negative effect of concurrency can be avoided by storing the data initially on staging devices (for example on a file library) and subsenotquently copying them to tape using object copy

Tip The test of the concurrency with a null device has proven effective in practice as a suitable test for the optimal setting In the case of backups via the network and backups of several servers mount points in one backup specification the value 10 has proven to be a reasonable starting value

Multi-streaming

A configuration of multi-streaming can increase the total data throughput rate for the configured mount point and thus contribute to reducing the total duration of the backup

As default only one disk agent per mount point to be backed up can be started in HP Data Protector Multi-streaming (multiple data streams) enables backing up of a number of parts of a mount point at the same time in that a number of disk agents are started for this mount point This method is very useful when very large mount points have to be backed up and saturation for the backup device cannot be reached or when the drive to be used is slower than the disks can deliver their data

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 20: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

20

Note For a backup with activated multi-streaming and a number of disk agents it should be borne in mind that the data are stored in a number of objects in the internal database and in the case of recovery all parts of the mount point have to be selected for the recovery One way around this is to adapt the description of the mount point

Possible scenarios for the application of multi-streaming can be

bull File servers with very large mount points and a numerous small files ndash the backup with a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents

bull Large mount points where the data are on very fast hard disks and where the backup to a single drive is too slow In this case configuration of the backup specification enables individual parts of the mount point to be backed up by a number of disk agents on a number of media agents

Howismulti-streamingconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoBackuprsquo Depending on the display extend the specifications select a backup specification and select the properties of the job In the lsquoSourcersquo tab select the desired server right-click on the server object and click lsquoCopyrsquo

This operation displays another object Now the directories to be backed up can be selected for each mount point

The optimal configuration of multi-streaming depends heavily on the environment involved and should be tested accordingly The speed of the hard disks on which the data are located and whether saturation of the drive can be reached are two factors to be taken into account for the configuration As long as saturation has not yet been reached and the disk agents are still able to deliver sufficient data an allocation between 2 to 4 disk agents per mount point in combination with the value of the disk agent concurrency and number of deployed drives is a very good setting

Tip The configuration is expedient for mount points with a size of more than 500 GB backup volume and if the tape device does not reach saturation Depending on the environment this setting can halve the backup time

Null device

Performance tests on a null device are a very good possibility to determine the read speed of a system and the optimal drive technology for the backup In the case of a backup of data onto a null device the media agent (and thus the drive) is bypassed and the received data rejected This allows the speed of a backup via the network to be determined and tests different settings of the block size segment size concurrency etc

Note Before using the null device it is recommended to change the parameter FileMediumCapacity in the file lsquoglobalrsquo as the default value is 100 (MB) and subsenotquently causes a mount request An adequately large medium can be created with a value of 100000

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 21: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

LTO 4 (MBs) LTO 5 (MBs) LTO 6 (MBs)

Native speed 120 140 160

Compression 201 (default)

240 280 mdash

Compression 251 (default)

mdash mdash 400

Compression 151 (ie file system backup)

180 210 240

Compression 351 (ie SAP R3)

420 490 560

21

HowisanulldeviceconfiguredIn the GUI of HP Data Protector in the context list switch to lsquoDevices amp Mediarsquo and lsquoAdd Devicersquo Use lsquoAdd Devicersquo to set up a new drive manually with device type Standalone

Enter SCSI address in the next tab - for Windows lsquonulrsquo and for Linux and Unix lsquodevnullrsquo is to be entered (the screenshot shows both variants)

The remaining settings (Block Size Concurrency etc) will be specified in the next steps At the end the drive configuration is saved and the null device is available for tests

Tip Use of the null device is suitable not only for determining the optimal settings for the drives but also for troubleshooting as neither media nor drive space are required

LAN vs SAN Backups

For the decision as to whether the data backup is to be carried out via the network or via SAN the possible data transfer rate to tape device has to be examined first LTO-5 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 140 MBs LTO-6 drives reach a data transfer rate of up to 160 MBs If the compression possibilities for the drives are also taken into account in this case a data transfer rate of 280 MBs for LTO-5 and 400 MBs for LTO-6 drives can be achieved with an assumed compression ratio of 21 for LTO-5 and 251 for LTO-6 As file system backups usually achieve lower compression ratios in comparison with backups from databases it is recommended to test the data transfer rates in each environment

The table below shows data transfer rates for LTO-4 LTO-5 and LTO-6 drives on the basis of the compression possibilities to provide help in reaching a decision as to how data backups and possible recoveries can be carried out effectively

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 22: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

22

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The compression ratio is an average value for the drive and the degree of compression fluctuates during the backup In order be able to exploit the maximum data transfer rate of the tape device the client to be backed up must deliver a higher throughput As a rule the calculation is with the factor of 2 for example in the case of a backup of an SAP database to an LTO-5 drive and an average compression ratio of 351 a data throughput rate of up to 980 MBs must be reached

If you now compare the possible data transfer rates in the network data transfer rates between 80 MBs and 105 MBs are usually reached in the 1-GbE network depending on the topology It can be seen that for a backup via the network at least one trunk consisting of several network adapters must be created For LTO-6 as drive technology at least one 10-GbE network is necessary

If the backup still has to be carried out via the network the data transfer rate should be kept constant An unfavorable data transfer rate shows the following screen

Fig 1

With adaptation of the settings (files lsquoomnircrsquo and lsquoglobalrsquo Concurrency Block Size etc) a significantly higher data transfer rate (Fig 1) can be achieved

Fig 2

In both cases the backup was carried out via one trunk (2 GbE ndash fault tolerance) Fig 1 shows an effective utilization of capacity of 40 in the 1-GbE network and Fig 2 a utilization of capacity of 50 in the 2-GbE network

There are alternatives for environments in which the implementation of trunks 10-GbE or SAN backups are not possible In virtual environments the bottleneck in the network can be bypassed using the lsquoVirtual Environment Integrationrsquo of HP Data Protector In this case the VMFS volumes of VMware can be presented to a media agent and the backups of the virtual machines take place via the SAN For slow systems in the SAN the backup can be carried out via a faster system by means of snapshot backup (Zero Downtime Backup) Another alternative is a backup per lsquoincremental foreverrsquo or via lsquoSource Side Deduplicationrsquo to minimize the network load

Tip SAN backups should always be preferred over LAN backups in order to be able to reach the maximum data transfer rate of a tape device If this is technically not possible or the fibre channel infrastructure does not deliver the transfer capacity for it a higher bandwidth is to be made available for the backup via network (trunks 10 GbE)

Tools

HP provides tools free of charge for performance measurenotments on virtually any platform The ldquoHP Library und Tape Toolsrdquo as a complete package are ideal for this (HP LTT - httph18006www1hpcomproductsstorageworkslttindexhtml) The tools enable measurement of the drive speeds with adjustable values for compression ratio and size of the files to be emulated Moreover the read and write speed for disk systems can be determined which provides a good starting point for the expected performance in the case of backups with backup-to-disk technologies HPReadData and HPCreateData (integrated in LTT) are available as standalone versions The type of data flow to be simulated can also be configured here For reading with HPReadData productive data can be accessed

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 23: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

23

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Alternatively the test can be carried out within HP Data Protector with the enabled option lsquoDisplay statistical infornotmationrsquo on a null device the average data transfer rate is displayed at the end of the backup The option is disabled again after the test The tool lsquoomnispeedrsquo can also be deployed (see httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpresss=omnispeed)

How is HP LTT usedFor a performance test of the hard disks (read speed of the disks) switch to lsquoSys Perfrsquo in LTT and set the desired options at lsquoBackup Performance Testrsquo The description corresponds to a concurrency of 3 in HP Data Protector where a block size of 512 kB is used

The result can be seen at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo at the end of the test The figure at lsquoTOTALrsquo corresponds to the total data throughput rate of the system

The speed of a restoration can be simulated at the lsquoRestore Performance Testrsquo tab This test is also suitable for determining the disk speed when backup-to-disk technologies are used in Data Protector

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 24: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

24

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

The result is shown at lsquoSystem Performance Resultsrsquo In the specific example the system has a data transfer rate of only 36 MBs and is not suitable as a long-term backup-to-disk solution

Tip The installation of LTT is recommended for every server with connected tape devices Before starting up the media agent on a server this tool should be used to carry out a measurement and document the results The individually available tools can be used for the measurement on backup-to-disk targets

Jukebox

Jukebox is a possibility to deploy backup-to-disk technologies in HP Data Protector free of charge Licensing is according to the number of drives to be used and there is no automated media management

Tip Experience has shown that Jukebox can only be used in productive environments to a limited extent as its restrictions and licensing by drives make it inflexible Depending on the environment and existing licenses it is unable to achieve the desired data throughput

File Library

The File Library is a device that writes the data onto internal or external disks (SAN or NAS shares) It consists of a number of directories to be configured and a number of definable drives (or writers) The File Library provides automatic media management and is currently the most frequently deployed backup-to-disk solution in Data Protector The virtually created media are called lsquofile depotsrsquo and can if required also be read as a configured slot in a jukebox The File Library is licensed with the advanced backup-to-disk license in TB and enables the creation of synthetic and virtual full backups (lsquoincremental foreverrsquo)

On creation of the File Library the size of the file depot files should be adapted as a large number of media are created in a backup when the default value of 5 GB per medium is used

Tip To test the File Library functions also for established customers HP offers 30-day test licenses for all functions in Data Protector

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 25: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

25

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

B2D ndash StoreOnce Software Deduplication

Deduplication has been possible with HP Data Protector since version 621 and it represents the HP strategy for backup-to-disk solutions The lsquoadvanced backup-to-diskrsquo license is required for deduplication Only the available disk space is licensed (maximum 20 TB per store root on one server if several servers are used the individual store roots need to be added up) and not the actual size of the backups created

Note If StoreOnce software deduplication is used in HP Data Protector there are additional requirements with regard to the number of CPUs and the main memory

Deduplication is a special compression method where the volume of the data to be backed up is reduced by not saving duplicates The data flow is divided into blocks (hash-based chunking) and these blocks are compared with one another If identical blocks are found one of them is replaced with a pointer to a block that has already been saved

StoreOnce deduplication is holistically integrated in HP Data Protector the deduplicated data can be transferred from the source to the target (source side server side and target side)

Tip The software store is ideal for backups in external offices with a subsequent copying process to headquarters on another software store or an HP StoreOnce system using the Catalyst interface The deduplicated data transferred via the WAN

Evaluations in HP Data Protector

The software provides various reporting options In larger environments HP Backup Navigator is available that provides advanced analytics and reporting capabilities in smaller environments (couple of servers backed up tape or disk) the integrated reports are often sufficient

For more information on Backup Navigator visit

httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

Which evaluations are recommendedThere are a large number of integrated reports in Data Protector These are the most frequently used reports along with a recommendation for frequency of execution

bull Configured clients not used by Data Protector ndash 1x weekly

bull Look up schedule ndash 1x weekly

bull IDB size report ndash 1x weekly

bull File systems not configured for backup ndash 1x weekly

bull List of pools ndash 1x weekly in larger environments daily

bull List of sessions ndash daily

bull Session errors ndash daily

Tip To automate the evaluations a report group is set up in Data Protector and assigned a schedule All of the reports created there are then executed automatically at the desired time If e-mail notification is selected for an individual report the created report is sent automatically depending on the set time

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 26: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

26

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

NotificationsinHPDataProtector

Various notifications are integrated into the software If a certain event occurs in the backup and recovery environment a corresponding notification is triggered

WhichnotificationsarerecommendedThere are a number of configured notifications in Data Protector The notifications used most frequently in practice are

bull DeviceError

bull FileLibraryDiskUsage

bull HealthCheckFailed

bull IDBCorrupted

bull IDBPurgeNeeded

bull IDBSpaceLow

bull IDBTablespaceSpaceLow

bull MountRequest

Tip As default all notifications are written into the event log by Data Protector For important notifications it is recommended to switch to e-mail notification (SMTP)

Connectivity to Monitoring Solutions

Any notification or any report can be sent across the Simple Network Monitoring Protocol (SNMP) interface per SNMP trap to a suitable application that can process SNMP traps Well known for this are HP Operations HP SIM or also Nagios (integrations and instructions are available for the HP products) All that needs to be done is to enter the SNMP target (Unix) in the evaluations or notifications For Windows the traps are sent to the target set in the Windows configuration

Tip The description of the necessary steps to set up SNMP by means of lsquoomnisnmprsquo on the Cell Server can be found in Data Protectorrsquos online help The MiB tables can be downnotloaded from the HP website in the product area for HP SIM

External tools

External tools are also suitable for documentation of the environment HP Backup Navigator creates reports on the HP Data Protector environment (backups media etc) for current and historical data for a single or multiple Cell Manager implementation

For more information on HP Backup Navigator please visit httpwwwautonomycomadaptivebackupbackup-navigator

A large number of ready-made reports can be used BRICK (lsquoBackup Related Information Collector and Keeperrsquo) is also available This tool collects information regarding the HP Data Protector configuration installed updates event logs log files etc and presents the results in a clearly arranged report

For more information regarding this tool refer to the website httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpressbrick

Tip For regular documentation of the backup environment BRICK can be run once a week on the Cell Server as a scheduled task

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 27: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

27

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Purge

Within the framework of daily maintenance on the Cell Server a purge of the internal database is carried out unless daily maintenance is disabled This purge however is often not sufficient for some environments or for environments with a large number clients to be backed up Over time the internal database can also be fragmented This delays search access in the database In this case it is a good idea to carry out a thorough purge of the internal database within the framework of maintenance dates The following points do not apply to HP Data Protector 8X as changes to the internal database mean that an extended purge is no longer necessary and is run automatically within the database

Note The extended purge requires exclusive access to the internal database During the entire operation no backups may run and the HP Data Protector GUI is to be closed If the purge is to be carried out on an MoM server the constraints mentioned also apply to all other Cell Servers of the MoM environment

How is an extended purge carried outThe following steps are necessary for the extended purge of the internal database Depending on the environment the proposed value 31 for the retention period can be replaced by another value (for example 60 days) The following procedure presupposes a basic understanding of the internal database command and directories

bullOmnidb - strip Removes the catalogue information from all objects that are no longer protected

bullOmnidbutil - clear Marks all aborted backups with the status lsquoIn Progressrsquo as lsquoFailedrsquo backups

bullOmnidbutil - purge_failed_copies Removes failed copy jobs

bullomnidbutil - purge - sessions 31 Removes all backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - messages 31 Removes all messages of backups without a protection period that are older than 31 days

bullomnidbutil - purge - dcbf -force Removes all data that are no longer required from the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil - purge - mpos Removes all object versions and media position that are no longer required from overwritten media

bullomnidbutil-fixmpos Synchronizes the MMDB after the purge of the DCBF directories

bullomnidbutil-purge-filenames-force Removes data that are no longer required from the lsquofilenamesrsquo ndash part of the internal database The progress can now be observed in the Data Protector GUI

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database without IDB check is recommended directly after the purge but this is not a requirement for the other steps

bullExport of the catalogue database A temporary directory is required for export of the database it must be at least the same size as the db40 directory The directory must not be in the network or on mapped drives The command for the export is

ndash omnidbutil -writedb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the export a copy of the MSG and DCBF directories is to be made

bullImport of the catalogue database The command for the import of the database is

ndash omnidbutil -readdb -cdb lttemporary directorygt After the import of the database the backup environment is available once again The MSG and DCBF directories must be copied back if the complete database was removed via omnidbinit before the import

bullBackup of the internal database A backup of the internal database with IDB check is recommended directly after the import in order to verify the integrity of the database after the import

Note An immediate purge of the internal database should be scheduled if the need for a purge is indicated in the event log by HP Data Protector This occurs when 180 days have elapsed since the last purge when a purge is likely to take longer than 120 minutes or the estimated number of file names to be deleted exceeds 6 million An e-mail notification can also be configured for this

Tip The report lsquoPurge Previewrsquo can be used to calculate whether the overhead for a thorough purge is worthwhile Alternatively the command lsquoomnirpt-report db_purge_previewrsquo can be used

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 28: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

28

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Recovery tests and disaster recovery

When was the recovery last tested Depending on the size of the environment the recovery of individual files can be a daily task or only a very rare task What is the case however when an entire system or service is involved When was the recovery last verified and logged for an entire system or service Regular recovery tests not only train the adminisnottrators to proceed adeptly when a serious situation arises they also validate the necessary processes within the environment One example of this is the process of re-storing the tapes required for the recovery of a system

Tip The following article can be used for recovery of the Cell Server by means of Enhanced Automated Disaster Recovery a check of the necessary requirements and automatic creation of a boot medium httpwwwdata-protectororgwordpress201103recover-cell-server-with-enhanced-automated-disaster-recovery The article is valid up to HP Data Protector version 7X under MS Windows 2008 R2

The recovery test of a system should take place regularly on a recurring fixed date The results of the test are to be logged and all additional preparatory and follow-up steps are to be documented

Note Each of the following possibilities should be tested for the environment in the event of a disaster (see also Data Protector online help for supported environments and restrictions) Once a decision has been made in favour of a method or a number of methods the methods should be tested and logged accordingly

HP Data Protector provides various possibilities to recover a system (described below for Microsoft Windows) For recovery options using HP Data Protector Version 8X please refer to the online help included in the software

bull One possibility is a new installation of the operating system on repaired hardware or rolling out a new virtual machine from a template then installing the Data Protector client on this server and subsequently starting the recovery for the required data

bull ldquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrdquo (EADR) is the best method for a recovery It is also suitable for recovery of the Cell Server and of a Microsoft cluster Here all the drivers and a minimal operating system are included in an ISO image in advance The ISO image can then be written onto a CD or integrated via HP iLO as a virtual drive This method is supported for Windows and Linux operating systems

bull lsquoOne Button Disaster Recoveryrsquo ndash this method is similar to the EADR method but here all the necessary steps of the EADR process are already carried out during the backup and written onto a bootable tape device

Tip Installation of the component lsquoAutomatic Disaster Recovery Modulersquo on the clients and backing up the configuration of the server (system state configuration object) enables recovery of an entire system when a serious situation arises and if necessary also on other hardware via the free function integrated in the starter pack lsquoEnhanced Automated Disaster Recoveryrsquo

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 29: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

29

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Application online backup agent

For the backup of databases it is recommended that you deploy an application-specific online backup agent that allows you to back up the databases in line with the requirements of transactions during regular operation Application Agents are available for Oraclereg Informix Sybase MS SQL Server MS SQL MS Exchange MS SharePoint Portal Server SAP SAP DBMaxDB SAP HANA Baan IV Lotus Notes Solid Database and DB2

Cell The cell typically represents a system or group of systems at a location or organizational unit connected to the same LAN this forming a lsquobackup cellrsquo The Cell Manager is the main system that controls and manages this cell This central instance manages backups and recovery guidelines and tasks

Cell managercell server Each lsquobackup cellrsquo requires a Cell Manager that specifies the backup strategy for the individual servers to be backed up and manages the index data The index data contains the information about when which files from which directory have been backed up to where (bar code of the tape etc) The Cell Manager is therefore the main system in a cell on which the essential Data Protector software is installed and from which all backup and recovery tasks are administered The graphical interface for administration can also be present on another system Each cell has a separate Cell Manager

Client A client can be any system in the cell such as a system that either delivers data for backup (disk agent or integration agent) or accepts data (media agent) and writes it onto a disk or tape device

Cluster A cluster is defined as a group of servers or other resources that behave jointly in the same way as an individual logical system to enable high availability or also load distribution and parallel processing A clustered computer can also be referred to as a clustered node

Data deduplication Data deduplication is a procedure for the compression of data in that duplicates are removed and replaced by a reference pointer These procedures are complex because a comparison of data blocks (so-called chunks) must always run during writing

Disaster case Occurrence of a catastrophe

Disaster recovery Recovery of the system after a complete failure

Disk agent Each server (client) from which data is to be backed up requires a disk agent that sends the files to be backed up from the file systems to a media agent

Disk staging Procedure in which the data backup is carried out on a hard disk area

Drivetape A drive refers to a physical unit that receives data from a computer system and can write it onto a magnetic medium (often a tape) It can also read data from a medium and send them to a computer system Drives can be tape devices (physical or virtual) and disk systems

E-LTU and E-Media ldquoElectronic licenses to userdquo are products and licenses that are only delivered electronically

Encryption Encryption means that the backed-up data are stored in encrypted (coded) form HP Data Protector contains automatic key management for both software and the encryption by LTO-4 to LTO-6 tapes The user can then perform client-based encryption or use the encryption functionality of the LTO tape devices HP Data Protector uses AES-256-bit encryption

Incremental forever Special form of data backup in which only the incremental changes to the data are backed up after an initial full backup

Glossary

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 30: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

30

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Term Definition

Instance Defines each implementation of the application installed on a server

Instant recovery Snapshots located on a storage system can be made available to the system again very quickly (see also lsquoZero Downtime Backuprsquo)

Internal database IDB The database of HP Data Protector in which all information regarding backups media drives etc is stored

Library A pool of one tape device or a number of tape devices with storage bays for media in a housing

License Authorization to use the corresponding function

Limited License to Use (LTU)Test License

A software license to use (LTU) which specifies in the period for which the license is valid its license description for example one month one year

LTU License To Use

Manager-of-manager (MoM) A number of cells can be grouped together and administered from a central cell The MoM contains all the clients localized in a number of Data Protector cells

Media agent A media agent accepts data to be backed up packages them in a save set and stores them on a backup medium A backup medium can be a disk or tape device In the case of advanced backup-to-disk the save sets are first stored on a disk and later copied to a tape device

Medium Typically a cassette tape or a file on a hard disk that contains backup data

Online integration See lsquoApplication Online Backup Agentrsquo

Pool Collection point for media in HP Data Protector

Quickspecs Special website at HP showing the specifications for a product in a clearly arranged form

Retention period Storage duration

Slot A slot defines a tape insertion point in a tape library Each slot can contain one medium for example an LTO tape HP Data Protector refers to each slot on the basis of an assigned digit To read a medium robotics move the medium from the slot into the drive

Source A source is the productive source from which data are drawn for the data backup or reloaded for data recovery

System state The configuration of the server consisting of settings for the network information regarding the hard disks users etc

Virtual machine A virtual machine is a computer system that does not physically exist rather is simulated by another computer Examples of virtual machines in VMware Hyper-V or XEN

Zero-downtime backup Snapshot-based backup of a storage solution

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 31: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

31

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Appendix A ndash Speeds

LTO drives Speed ndash uncompressed Speed ndash compressed Colour HP LTO media Additional functions

LTO-1 20 MBs 40 MBs Blue mdash

LTO-2 40 MBs 80 MBs Dark Red mdash

LTO-3 80 MBs 160 MBs Yellow WORM

LTO-4 120 MBs 240 MBs Green WORM encryption

LTO-5 140 MBs 280 MBs Light blue WORM LTFS encryption

LTO-6 160 MBs 400 MBs Purple WORM LTFS encryption

LTO DRIVES

Fibre channel HBAs

Network boards

Network boards

FC Speed in Gbits Speed in MBss

1 GFC 1 100

2 GFC 2 200

4 GFC 4 400

8 GFC 8 800

16 GFC 16 1600

LAN Gross MBits

Transfertheoretical MBs

Transferpractical MBs

100BASE-X 100 125 8-10

1 GbE 1000 125 80-100

10 GbE 10 GbE 1000 1250 800-1000

Hard disks Bandwidth in MBs

SATA 150

SATA II 300

SATA III 600

SAS 300

SAS II 600

SAS III 1200

All specifications of speeds are gross values and will vary in practice For LTO-1 drives to LTO-5 drives a compression ratio of 21 is assumed for LTO-6 drives a compression ration of 251 is assumed Sources of the values are articles from German-speaking Wikipedia (httpdewikipediaorg) The specifications of each manufacturer provide statements regarding the data throughput rates of hard disks in storage systems

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer

Page 32: HP Data Protector Best Practice Guide Enu

Technical white paper | Best practice guide for HP Data Protector

Sign up for updates hpcomgogetupdated Share with colleagues

copy Copyright 2015 Hewlett-Packard Development Company LP The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein

20150521_LC_TWP_Best_Practice_Guide_for_HP_Data_Protector

Additional sources of information

HP Data Protector Websitehttpwwwhpcomgodataprotector

HP Data Protector Manuals (passport account required)httpsupportopenviewhpcomselfsolvemanual

HP Data Protector Quickspecs httph18000www1hpcomproductsquickspecs11671_div11671_divpdf

HP Deduplication Solutionshttpwwwhpcomgostoreonce

Enterprise Backup Solution Guidehttpwwwhpcomgoebs

HP Library and Tape Toolshttpwwwhpcomsupporttapetools

HP Storage Sizer (only available to partners)httpwwwhpcomgostorageworkssizer